Chevrolet - EXTENDED CAB PICKUP - Brochure - 1994 - 1994

-. I O W N E R ’ S MAIVUAL INTRODUCTION 1994 Chevrolet C/KPickup Owner’s Manual Welcome This manual was prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your 1994 Chevrolet C/K Pickup orchassis and to provide important safety information. Thereis also a ChevroletTruck Warranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet. In some vehicles, there can be information manuals from othermanufacturers like body builders orspecial equipment companies.We urge you to review all these publications carefully. This will help you enjoy safeand trouble-free operation of your vehicle. When it comes to service, keepin mind that your Chevrolet dealerknows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your dealer invites you to return for all of your service needs both during and after the warranty period. Remember, if you have a concern ana need help handling it to your satisfaction, see the procedurein the Chevrolet Truck Warranty andOwner Assistance Information booklet. Thanks for choosing a Chevrolet product. We value you as amember of the Chevrolet family. We want to assure you of our continuing interest in your pleasure and satisfaction with your vehicle. Chevrolet Motor Division General Motors Corporation 30007 Van Dyke Ave. Warren, Michigan @Copyright 1993 General Motors Corporation, ChevroletMotor Division. All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A. aecond Edition i important Notes to Owners and Drivers ....About This Manual: Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, pleaseleave this manual in it so the new owner can use it. This manual includes the latest information at the timeit was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice, For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a French Language Manual: Auxproprietuires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guideen francais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7. L General Motors, GM, the GM Emblem, Chevrolet and the Chevrolet emblem are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. .. 11 Model Reference This manual covers these models: REGULAR CAB PICKUP EXTENDED CAB PICKUP CREW CAB CHASSIS CAB 3500 HD CHASSIS CAB ... 111 Table of Contents Introduction - How to Use this Manual This section tells you how to useyour manual and includes safety and vehicle damage warnings and symbols. Section 1 - Seats and Safety Restraints This section tells you how to use your seats and safety restraints properly. Section 2 - Features & Controls This section explains how to start andoperate your Vehicle. Section 3 - Comfort Controls & Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. Section 4 - Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. Section 5 - Problems on theRoad This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating. Section 6 - Service & Appearance Care Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your Vehicle running properly and looking good. Section 7- Schedule Maintenance Services This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. Section 8 - Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact your GM division for assistance and how to get service publications. Italso gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8-4. Index Here’s an alphabetical listing ofalmost every subject inthis manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. iv . How to Use This Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. This will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. INDEX: A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of all that’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. SECTION 1-6: Each section of this manual begins with a brief list of its contents, so you can often find ata glance if a section contains the information you want. SECTION 7: This section of the manual covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. SECTION 8 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE:This section includes important information about reporting safety defects and gives you details about the “Roadside Assistance” program. You will also find customer satisfaction phone numbers (including customer satisfaction numbers for the hearing and speech impaired) as well as the mediatiodarbitration procedure. We’ve also included ordering information for service publications in this part. Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box with gray background and the wordCAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. In the gray caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,’’ “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.’’ V Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: ~~ ~~~~~ ~~ NOTICE: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. In the notice area, we tell you about something that candamage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what todo to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals,you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for cautions, blue for notices and the wordsCAUTION or NOTICE. Vi Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you will find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols areused on an original battery: Protect Eyes by Shielding Cautron Possible Injury Caustic Battery Spark Acid Could Cause Burns or Flame Could Explode Battery U A void Sparks or Flames These symbolsare important foryou and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: I Fasten Safety Belts I , Door LocWUnlock vi i These symbols have to do with your lights: A Master Light Switch Headlight High Beam Hazard Warning Flasher Turn Signal Direction 1 0 Parking Lights Daytime Running Lights Fog Lights These symbols are on some of your controls: I Windshield Wiper I Windshield Defroster Windshield Washer 38 - Ventilating Fan Air Vents ... Vlll I Rear Window Defogger These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: ~~~ ~ Engine Coolant Temperature Battery Charging System fuel Engine Oil Pressure 0 UI Brake SHIFT RELEASE U Shift Light Parking Brake Release Here are some other symbols you may see: Horn Fuse Lighter Hood Release ix Low Coolant Notes X Seats and Safety Belts Section I Here you’ll find information aboutthe seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some thingsyou should not do with safety belts . Seats and Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Frontseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 * 1-5 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Why Safety Belts Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 How To Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 1-16 Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 1-23 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .......................... Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 1-44 Replacing Your Safety Belts Aftera Crash ...................... 1-1 Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats - how to adjust them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints. Front Seats Manual Front Seat If your vehicle hasa manual bucket, split bench, or full bench seat, you can adjust it with this lever at the front of the seat. Slide the lever at thefront of the seat toward theouter seat support to unlock it. Using your body, slide the seat to where you want it. Then, release the lever and try to move the seat with your body,to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-2 Power Seat If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s side, you can adjust it with this switch at the front of the seat. P You can use the center switch knob to move the seat where you want it. To raise the seat, move the center switch knob LIP. To lower the seat, move the center switch knob down. To move the seat forward, move the center switch knob toward the inside of the vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the center knob toward the outside of the vehicle. You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To raise the front of the seat, move the inner switch lever up. To lower the front ofthe seat, move the inner switch lever down. To raise the rear of the seat, move the outer switch lever up. To lower the rear of the seat, move the outer switch lever down. Reclining Front Seatback (Bucket or Split BenchSeat) To adjust the seatback, lift the front of this lever. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Pull up on the front of the lever and the seatback will go to an upright position. Don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. 1-3 1-4 Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Seatback Latches(Full Bench Seat) The front seatback folds forward to let you access the rear of the cab. Your seatback will move back and forth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then it will lock in place. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to fold forward. Access to the rear of the cab is available by using the rear doors. Seatback Latches (Bench Seat With Armrest) The frontseatback folds forward to let you access the rear of the cab. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to fold forward. Access to therear of the cab is available by using the rear doors. To fold a seatback forward, pull this lever up and fold the To return the seatback to the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until it latches. 1-5 After returning the seatback to its upright position, pullthe seatback forward to make sure it is locked. Seatback Latches (Redining Sp/it Bench and Reclining Bucket Seats) The front seatback folds forward to let you access the rear of the cab. To fold the seatback forward, lift this lever. 1 Lift the front of the lever and theseatback will fold forward. To return the seatback to the upright position, pushtheseatback rearward until it latches. After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatbackforward to make sure itis locked. Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only) The driverand passenger front bucketseat and the 40/60 split bench seat of your vehicle has an easy entryfeature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat. 1-6 To operate the seat pull forward on the top of the lever, located at the side of the seatback, and tilt the back forward toward the front of the vehicle. When you do the seat bottom will release. Just pull or push the seat forward until it stops. To return the seat to its regular position, return the seatback to its upright position, then push the whole seat rearward until it latches. After returning the seat to its regular position, try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-7 Rear Seats Rear Folding Seat (Extended Cab Models) The extended cab may have a rear folding seat which can be foldeddown for more seating space. To use the seat, pull the entire seat forward until it is flat. Pull forward on the RELEASE lever, under the right-hand side of the seat cushion. Push the seatback rearward until it latches. After pushing the seatback upright into position, pull the seatbackforward to make sure it is locked. To store the seat, pull forward on the RELEASE lever, under the right-hand side of the seat cushion. Fold the seatback forward until it latches with the seat cushion. Lift the entire seat and pushit rearward into place. Make sure the seat is secure. Rear Seat (CrewCab) You can adjust the seat by sliding the adjuster lever at the front of the seat toward the seat support to unlock it. Slide theseat to where you want it. Then release the leverand try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked intoplace. Rear Seat Seatback Latch (Except Bench With Armrest) The rear seatback can be folded forwardto let you reach the area behind it. Your seatback will move back and forth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then, itwill lock into place. Rear Seat Seatback Latch (Bench Seat With Armrest) The rear seatback folds forwardto let you access the area behind it. To fold a seatback forward, pull this lever up and fold the seatback forward. To return the seatbackto the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until it latches. After returningthe seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. 1-9 Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. Italso tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. This figure lights up as a reminder to buckle up.(See “Safety Belt Reminder Light’’ in the Index.) It will light when you turn the key to RUN or START when your safety belt isn’t buckled, and you’ll hear a tone or buzzer, too. In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll bein a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. 1-10 A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or onanything, you go as fast as it goes. 1-11 When the bikehits the block, it stops. But the child keeps going! -- Put someone on it. 1-12 Get it up to speed. Then stop the “vehicle.” The rider doesn’t stop. I The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... or the instrument panel ... 1-13 or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts-and the Answers Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can easily unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q : Why don’t they just putin air bags so people won’t have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in some vehicles today and will be in more of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only - so they work with safety belts, not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 1-14 Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should 1 wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -even one that isn’t your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to “Run” or “Start,” a light will come onfor about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. Unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled, a tone will also sound. How To Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This section is only for people of adult size. Be awarethat there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the section after this one, called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. 1-15 Driver Position This section describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belf The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wearit properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. 1-16 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. (On some models, you may hear a clicking sound as the belt is pulled out. Theclicking sound is the shoulder belt tension feature operating properly.) Don’t let the belt get twisted. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender” at theend of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restrainingforces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. 1-17 Q: What’s wrong with this? I A: I I I 1 The shoulderbelt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-18 Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-19 Q: What's wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. 1-20 Q: What's wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-21 Q: What's wrong with this? f A: 1 I 1 8 The belt is twisted across the body. - To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, besure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, includingpregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, thekey to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as thedriver’s safety belt. See “DriverPosition,’’ earlier in this part. When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. 1-23 Center Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has front and rear benchseats, someone can sit in the center positions. When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. 1-24 To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. as the lap part of a lap-shoulder Buckle, position and release it the same way belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Rear Seat Passengers (Extended Cab and CrewCab) It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike othersin the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab) 1-25 Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s howto wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. (On some models, you may hear a clicking sound as the belt is pulled out. The clicking sound is the shoulder belt tension feature operating properly.) Don’t let the belt get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate andkeep pulling until you can buckle it. Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section, Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 1-26 To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching thethighs. In a crash, this applies forceto the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-27 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Crew Cab) Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’show to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. (On some models, you may hear a clicking sound as the belt is pulled out. The clicking sound is the shoulder belt tension feature operating properly.) Don’t let the belt get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 1-28 The lap part ofthe belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks only if there's a sudden stop or a crash. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-29 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact, thelaw in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies 1-30 1-31 Child Restraints Be sureto follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Where to Put the Restraint (Except Extended Cab and Crew Cab) The child restraint must be secured properly in the center or right front passenger seat. Where to Put the Restraint (Extended Cab and Crew Cab) Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an infant and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front seat where you can keep an eye on the baby. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it. Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. 1-32 If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it. Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Position (Extended Cab) You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 3. Pull out the vehicle’s safety belt. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pullingit along the belt. 4. Run the lap and shoulder portions through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 1-33 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. Make sure the buckle end of the belt is pulled out all the way. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To ?&rnov$the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-34 Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Position (Crew Cab) You'll be using the lapshoulder belt. See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-35 5. Pull the rest of the lapbelt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6 . To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it issecure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-36 Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat Positio When you secure a child restraint in a center seating position, you’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it alone the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-37 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turnthe latch plate over and buckle it again. Then see if it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint makerfor their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt.It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1 . Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint asthe instructions say. 1-38 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lapand shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulderbelt goes in front of the child's face or neck,put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the lapbelt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. A A 1-39 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-40 Larger Children Children who have outgrown child restraints should we.ar the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up canbe thrown out in a crash. Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. 1-41 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the childso is small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face orneck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one. 1-42 Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Safety Belt Exfender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten aroundyou, you should use it. But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose.Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it tothe regular safety belt. 1-43 Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then, makesure all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages and reminder systems are working properly. Look for any loose parts or damage. If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from doing its job, have it repaired. Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. Butif the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at the time of thecollision. Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is torn. Torn or frayed belts may not protectyou in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Before replacing any safety belt,see your dealer for the correct part number. You’ll need the model year and model number for your vehicle. The model year is on your title and registration. Andyou can find the model number on the Certificationflire label of your vehicle. See “Certification/Tire Label” in the Index. 1-44 The model number on the replacement belt must be listed on the safety belt you want to replace. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out to see this label. 1-45 Notes 1-46 Features and Controls Section . Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle. and information on starting. shifting and braking . Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly- and what to do if you have a problem . For explanation of vehicle symbols. refer to “Vehicle Symbols” in the Introduction . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Your Doors and How They Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2-12 Starting Your Gasoline Engine ............................... Starting YourDiesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 2-21 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Five-Speed Manual Transmission (With Low Gear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 New Vehicle “Break-In” Five-Speed Manual Transmission (Without Low Gear) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Front Axle Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Tiltwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Four-WheelDrive Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Headlight High-Low Beam Headlights and Vehicle Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Cigarette LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Warning Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Feed Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 Camper Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Trailer Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Step Bumper Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 Mirrors 2-2 Keys The square-shaped key is for the ignition only. 2-3 The oval-shaped key is for the doors and all other locks. \ When a new vehicleis delivered, the dealer removes the plugs from the keys, and gives them to the first owner. Each plug has a code on it that tells yourdealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the plugs in asafe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using these plugs. NOTICE: Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft, But you can have a of lottrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys, 2-4 Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle: From the outside: Use your door key. 2-5 From the inside: To lock the door, slide the lever on your door down. To unlock the door, slide the lever up. Power Door Locks (Option) Press the bottom of the power door lock switch, marked LOCK, on either front door to lock all the doors at once. Press the switch marked UNLOCK to unlock all the doors at once. On Crew Cab models, the switch on each rear door works only that door’s lock. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors- that’s a safety feature. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open yourdoor and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. 2-6 Your Doors and How They Work Side Doors To open the door from the outside, pull the handle up and pull the door open. To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward you and push the door open. .... . . ... . ....... I..L~ 2-7 Tailgate You can open rne tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. To shut the tailgate, firmly push it away from you into the latch. When you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards you, to besure that it latches securely. Tailgate Removal The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible finish damage. To remove the tailgate: Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. To release the cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight out and push the cable clips forward. 2-8 0 With the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull back on the tailgate at the right edge and then move the tailgate to the right, to release the left edge. Reverse the above procedure to re-install. Make sure the tailgate is secure. Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it canmake it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Key in the lgnifion you walk away from your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves - so don’t do it. 11 When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locks your transmission. And remember to lock the doors. Parking af Night Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle.Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. 2-9 Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if youtohave leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? 0 Put your valuables in a storage area or console. Lock the console. 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s. 9 Then take the door key with you. New Vehicle “Break-In ” I NOTICE: Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you followthese guidelines: Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 kmh) or less for the first 500 miles (804 km). Don’t drive at any one speed -fast or slow - for the first 500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new-brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this “breaking-in” guideline every time you get newbrake linings. New Vehicle “Break-In” - 3500 HD Model If you have a3500 HD model, your parking brake requires a special break-in procedure. See “Parking Brake” in the Index. 2- 10 Ignition Switch Use your square key to start your vehicle. The square key lets you turn the ignition switch to five different positions: 1 . OFF 2. RUN 3 3. START 4. ACC 5. LOCK ACC (Accessory): ACClets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engineis off. To get into ACC, push in the key and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, justas it was before you inserted the key. LOCK: This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK. OFF: This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed). RUN: This is the position for driving. START This starts your engine. 2-11 t NOTICE: If your key seemsstuck in “Lock” and you can’t turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while youturn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a toolto force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. Key Release Lever The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release lever is used. To Remove the Key On manual transmission vehicles, turn the keyto the LOCK position while pressing the key release lever down (see thecaution earlier in this section about the key release lever). Keeping yourfinger on the lever, pull the key straight out. On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the keyto LOCK and pull it straight out. Starting Your Gasoline Engine If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel Engine” in the Index. Engines start differently. The 8thdigit of your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow theproper steps to start the engine. 2-12 Automatic Transmission: Move your shift leverto “ P ’ (Park) or“N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use “ N ’ (Neutral) only. r ~ ~~ Don’t try to shift to “P” (Park) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift“P” to (Park) only when your vehicleis stopped. Manual Transmission: Hold the clutch pedal to the floor, then shift your gear selector to neutral while starting the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature. To start your 4.3 Liter (Code Z ) V6 or 5.0L (Code H)V8 engine: 1 . Without pushing the accelerator pedal,turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in “Start” for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start.” If it doesn’t start in three seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, oruntil it starts. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try this: Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then, hold the key in “Start” for no more than ten seconds. This clears theextra gasoline fromthe engine. If the enginestill doesn’t start,wait another 15 seconds and do it all again. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and the acceleratorpedal. 2-13 NOTICE: Your engineis designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the fuel injection system operates. Before adding If you don’t, your electrical equipment, check with your dealer. engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, seethe partof this manual thattells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “TowingYour Vehicle” in the Index. To start your 5.7 Liter (CodeK ) or 7.4 Liter (CodeN ) V8 engine: 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in “Start” for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, holdyour key in “Start.” If it doesn’t start in three seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try this: Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cooldown. Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key in “Start” for no more than ten seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds and do Step 3 again. Hot Engine Restart (Vehicles With 5.7L LO5 Engine and Over 8500 lbs. GVWR): If your engine isalready hot and then stalls, turn your ignition key to OFF. Then, turn your key to RUN, and wait about 20 seconds before you restart your engine. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. If your engine isalready hot and then stalls, turn your ignition key toOFF. Then turn your key to “Run” and wait 20 seconds before you restart your engine. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. 2-14 NOTICE: Your engine is designed to workwith the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer.If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. ~ If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the partof this manual that tellshow to do it without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing YourVehicle” in the Index. Driving Throh Ih Deep Standing Water NOTICE: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage yourengine. If you can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive through them very slowly. Driving Through Water (Diesel Engines) NOTICE: Never drive through standing water more than 8 inches deep if your vehicle has a diesel engine. Also, don’t drive through any standing water faster than5 mph (8 km/h). If you do, water can be drawn in through the air intake, and thisseverely can damage yourengine. Driving In Snow (Diesel Engines) When driving in a heavy snowstorm or in swirling snow with a diesel engine, snow can get into the air intake system. If you keep driving in these conditions the air cleaner may get plugged, causing black smoke and loss of power. In an emergency, if the air cleaner gets plugged with snow, you can remove the air cleaner. Then, drive to a place of safety as soon as possible and put the air cleaner back on. 2- 15 Starting Your Diesel Engine Your diesel engine starts differently than a gasoline engine. 1 . Automatic Transmission: Move your shift lever to “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use “N” (Neutral) only. NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to“P” (Park) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift “P” to (Park) only when your vehicle is stopped. 2. Manual Transmission: Move your shift lever to neutral and hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature. Turn your ignition key to RUN. Don’t turn it to “Start.” With the ignition in RUN, the “GLOW PLUGS” light will come on. If the engine is already warm, this light may notcome on. That’s normal. During starting, your “GLOW PLUGS” light may go on and off a few times. This is normal. This means that part ofyour engine is being warmed up for better starting. When the lightgoes off, your engine is ready to start. Do not start the engine wi . this light on. I NOTICE: If the “GLOW PLUGS” light stays on, it means that your vehicle could have oneof several problems, so you should have it serviced right away. I 3. If this light does not come on, or the instant the light goes off, turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine starts, let go of the key. NOTICE: Holding your key in “Start” for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2- 16 4. If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, turn the ignition key to OFF. Wait one minute for the starter to cool, then try the same steps again. If you’re trying to start your engine after you’ve run out of fuel, follow the steps in “Running Out of Fuel” (see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the Index). When your engine is cold, let it run for a few minutes before you move your vehicle. This lets oil pressure build up. Your engine will sound louder when it’s cold. I NOTICE: If you’re not inan idling vehicle and the engine overheats, you wouldn’t be there to see the coolant temperature gage. This could damage your vehicle. Don’t let your engine run when you’re not in your vehicle. Cold Weather Starting (Diesel Engine) The following tips will help you get good starting in cold weather. Use SAE 10W-30 oil when the outside temperature drops below freezing. When the outside temperature drops below 0°F (-1 8”C), use your engine coolant heater. If you park your vehicle in a garage, you shouldn’t need to use the coolant heater until the garage temperature goes below 0°F (-1 8”C), no matter how cold it is outside. To use the engine coolant heater, first turn off the engine. Then open the hood, unwrap the electrical cord and plug it in. It uses normal house voltage (1 10 volts), but: 2-17 I NOTICE: After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord in the manner itwas, to help keepit away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be torn and damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the weather, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Follow this chart. Engine Coolant Heater Usage Viscosity/ Oil Grade 32°F to 0°F (OOC to -18°C) 0°F to -10°F (-18 ” C to-23 O C ) SAE 1OW-30 SAE 15W-40 Not Required Not Required Two Hours* Two Hours* Below -10°F Below -23” C Eight Hours* or Overnight Eight Hours:’c or Overnight *The times listed are minimum times. It will not harm either the coolant heater or the vehicle to leave the coolant heater plugged in longer than the times stated. For best results in cold weather, use Number I-D diesel fuel or a “winterized” Number 2-D fuel. lf Your Diesel Engine Won’t Start If you’ve run out of fuel, look at “Running Out of Fuel” (see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the Index). If you’re not out of fuel, and your engine won’t start, do this: Turn your ignition key to RUN. Make sure that the “GLOW PLUGS” light is out. Then turn the ignition key to START. If the light doesn’t go off, wait a few seconds, then try starting your engine again. And, see your dealer as soon as you can for a starting system check. 2- 18 If the light comes on and then goes off and you know your batteries are charged, but your engine still won’t start, your vehicle needs service. If the light does not come on when the engine is cold, your vehicle needs service. If your batteries don’t have enough charge to start your engine, see “Battery” in the Index. Be sure you have the right oil for your engine, and that you’ve changed the oil at the proper times. If you use the wrong oil, your engine may be harder to start. If the engine starts, runs a short time, then stops, your vehicle needs service. Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) In very cold weather, 0°F (-1 8OC) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. 2-19 To use the coolant heater: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt outlet. NOTICE: After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord as you If it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. don’t, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the weather, the kindof oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact a GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. 2-20 Automatic Transmission There are several different positions for your shift lever. P (Park) This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine becauseyour vehicle can’t move easily. 2-21 R (Reverse) Use this gear to back up. NOTICE: Shifting into“R” (Reverse) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift“R” to (Reverse) only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice orsand without damaging your transmission, see “If Your Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. N (Neutral) In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re already moving,use “N” (Neutral) only. Also, use “ N ’ (Neutral) when your vehicle is being towed. I NOTICE: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting ofout “P” (Park) or‘W’ (Neutral) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. 2-22 0 @ (Automatic Overdrive) This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: - Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. - Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. @ should not be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off road driving. Select “D”(third gear) when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions. 0 D (Third Gear) This is like @, but you never go into Overdrive. You should use “D” when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. 0 2 (Second Gear) This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use “2” on hills. It can help controlyour speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on. If you manually select “2”, the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. 0 1 (First Gear) This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than “2.” You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in “ I ,” the transmission won’t shift into st gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. NOTICE: If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck invery deep sandor mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into “P” (Park) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. 2-23 Five-Speed Manual Transmission (With Low Gear) This is your shift pattern. Here’s how to operate your transmission: L (Low Gear) is intended only for heavy loads and is not recommended for normal driving. .. ... L (Low Gear) - Press the clutch pedal and shift into “L”.Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into “L” only when the vehicle speed is below5 mph (8 kmh). If you try to shift into “L” at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the “L” position until vehicle speed is reduced. 1 (First Gear)- Press the clutch pedal and shiftinto “1 .” Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into “1” when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 kmh). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hardto shift into “1 ,” put the shift lever in “N” (Neutral) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into “1.” If you try to shift into “1” at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the “I” position until vehicle speed is reduced. 2 (Second Gear)- Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into “2.” Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Higher Gears - Shift into the higher forward gears the same way you do for “2.” Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. 0 To Stop - Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to “N” (Neutral). 0 N (Neutral) - Use this position when you start or idle your engine. R (Reverse) - To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait 3-5 seconds for the internal parts tostop spinning and then, shift into “R.” Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal. 2-24 NOTICE: Shift to“R” (Reverse) only after your vehicleis stopped. Shifting to “R” (Reverse) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. Also, use Reverse, along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. I . Five-Speed Manual Transmission (Without Low Gear) This is your shift pattern. Here’s how to operate your transmission: 0 1 (First Gear)- Press the clutch pedal and shift into “1 .” Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into “ I ” when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 k d h ) . If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hardto shift into “1 ,” put the shift lever in Neutral and let upon the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into “1 .” 0 2 (Second Gear) - Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into “2.” Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. 3,4 and 5 (Third, Fourth and Fifth Gears)- Shift into “3,” “4” and “5” the same way you do for “2.” Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. To Stop -Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral. 2-25 0 R (Reverse) - To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait 3-5 seconds for the internal parts to stop spinning and then, shift into “R.” Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. I NOTICE: I Shift to“R” (Reverse) only after your vehicle is stopped. is moving could Shifting to“R” (Reverse) while your vehicle damage your transmission. Also, use Reverse, along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. Shift Light If you have a manual transmission, you may have a SHIFT light. This light will show you when to shift to the next highergear for best fuel economy. When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gearif weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when the lightcomes on. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore theSHIFT light when you downshift. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer case is in 4-LOW. 2-26 Manual Transmissions- Shift Speeds If you have a five-speed manual transmission (with low gear), this chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy. Recommended Shift Speeds - Five Speed Manual Transmission with Low Gear* Engine (VIN Code) Acceleration Shift SpeedMPH (KM/H) 4.3L V6 (2) 15 (24) 40 (64) 50 (80) 5.7L V8 (K) 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) Cruise Shift SpeedMPH (KM/H) 25-40 (40-64) 4.3L V6 (Z) 45-50 (72-80) *L (low) is intended for use with heavy loads and is not recommended for normal driving If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 k d h ) , or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good performance. NOTICE: If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or if you race the engine when you downshift, you can damage the engine, clutch or transmission. 2-27 Locking Rear Axle If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the other does, the locking feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle. To set the parkingbrake: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. To release the parking brake: Hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the lever, locatedjust above the parking brake pedal, marked RELEASE to release the parking brake. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off. 2-28 NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other partsof your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any See hill:“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to dofirst to keep the trailer from moving. Propshaft Brake Burnish Procedure If you have a 3500 HD model, it is recommended that the propshaft mounted parking brake be burnished as part of the new vehicle breakin. The parking brake will work bestafter it has been burnished following these instructions. Make 10 (ten) stops, using the parking brake foot pedal, from 20 mph (32 kmh) about 2 1/2 miles (4 km) apart. In between stops, drive the vehicle at 20 mph (32 k d h ) . Torque Lock The parking brake should be set first whenever you leave the driver’s seat. If you are parked on a hill and the transmission is placed in “P” (Park) before the parking brake is set, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. It may be difficultto pull the selector lever out of “P” (Park). This iscalled “torque lock.” To preventthis, the parking brake should be set BEFORE moving the gear selector to “P” (Park). When preparing to move a vehicle parked on a hill, the selector lever should be moved out of “P’ (Park) BEFORE releasing the parking brake. Even when on level surfaces, its a good idea to set the parking brake first before shifting the transmission from “ P ’ (Park). If torque lock does occur, you may haveto have another vehicle nudge your vehicle uphill a little to take some of the pressure off the transmission while you pull the selector lever out of “P’ (Park). 2-29 Shifting Into “P” (Park) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) Steering Column Shift Lever 1 . Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. *../: I 2. Move the shift lever into “ P ’ (Park) position like this: Pull the lever toward you. Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral) 4. Move the ignition key to LOCK. 2-30 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can walk away from your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in “P” (Park). Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only) If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in “ P ’ (Park) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure that the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral). After you’ve moved the shift lever into the “P” (Park) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from “P” (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into “P” (Park). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into “P’ (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of “P” (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into “P” (Park) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of “P’(Park) BEFORE you release the parking brake. If “torque lock” does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of “ P ’ (Park). 2-31 Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transmission in “R’ (Reverse), turn off the engine, and firmly apply the parking brake. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t. If you are parking on a hill, or if your pulling a trailer, see “Parking on Hills” or “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. Parking Over Things That Burn 2-32 Engine f .hat 3 - Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in “N” (Neutral), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in “P” (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer” in the Index. Four- Wheel Drive If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive, you must be familiar with it’s operation. Read the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You should use 2H for most normal driving conditions. Rear-wheel antilock brakes do not work when you shift into four-wheel drive. Your regular brakes will still work. When you shift back into two-wheel drive, your rear-wheel antilock brakes will take overagain. 2-34 I NOTICE: I Driving in the4H or 4L positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. Transfer Case The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. An indicator n,&ar the levershows you the transfer case settings. The front axle portion of the indicator diagram will light up when you shift into four-wheel drive. Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal. If the indicator light does not light up, or if the front axle light does not go out after you shift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. 2-35 When your headlights or parking lights are on, rotate the dial to the right of your headlight switch up to brighten, or down to dim, your transfer case indicator light. 2H (2-Wheel High): Thissetting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 4H (4-Wheel High): This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4H when you need extra traction, such as on wet or icyroads, or in most off-road situations. N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed or when using a power take-off. 4L (4-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra power, but should be used only for off-road driving. You can shift from 2H to 4H or from 4H to 2H while the vehicle is moving. Your front axle will engage faster if you take your foot off of the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. In extremely cold weather it may be necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to shift out of 2H. To shift into orout of 4L or “N” (Neutral): Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1-3 mph (2-5 k d h ) and shift your transmission into neutral. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion. Don’t pause in “ N , (Neutral) as you shift the transfer case into 4L, or your gears could clash. Remember that driving in 4H or 4L may reduce fuel economy. Also, driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift. Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock isnormal. If the outside temperature is very hot, or the vehicle has been used under hard driving conditions, there may be a slight delay for the axle to unlock. Whenever you are in four wheel drive, the rear wheel anti-lock brake system does not operate. The regular brake system operates normally. When you shift back into two-wheel drive, the anti-lock brake system will operate. 2-36 Windows To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower your side door windows. If you have the optional power windows, the controls are on each of the side doors. The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Your power windows will work when theignition has been turned to ACC or RUN. Push theswitch with the down-pointing arrow to lower the window. Push the switch with the up-pointing arrow to raise the window. 2-37 Sliding Rear Window (Option) You may have a four-piece or a three-piece sliding rear window. To open a four-piece sliding rear window, pull the latch lever forward and release it from the latch plate. Then, slide each side of the window to an open position. TOopen a three-piece window, press the latch and slide the window to an open position. To close a four-piece window, slide each window toward the center of the vehicle until they meet. Then, hook the latch lever onthe latch plate and press rearward firmly on the latch lever.Be sure the latch lever snaps in the locked position. To close a three-piece window, slide the window until the latch clicks in the locked position. When you close the window be sure the latch fully engages in the locked position. Swing-Out Windows (Option-Extended Gab) To open a rear swing-out window, just flip the latch open and swing theglass out. 2-38 Horn To sound the horn, press the pad inthe center of the steering wheel. The pad has a horn symbol on it. I Tilt Wheel (Option) A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. To adjust the tilt steering wheel: While holding the steering wheel, pull the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 2-39 Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your: I Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlight High-Low Beam & Passing Signal WindshieldWipers WindshieldWasher Cruise Control (Option) Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward (for right signal) and two downward (for left signal) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. 2-40 A green arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the green arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you releaseit. As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the green arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse (see “Fuses” in the Index). Headlight High-Low Beam To change the headlights from low beam to high or high to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you. Then release it. 2-41 When the highbeams are on, this blue light on the instrument panel also will be on. Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it. For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then letgo. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer. You can set the wiper speedfor a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very usefulin light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay. For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to the LO position. For high speed wiping, turn the band further,to HI. To stop the wipers, move the band to the off symbol. Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent youfrom seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. 2-42 Heavy snow or ice canoverload your wipers. The windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Although. the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc. may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers. Windshield Washer At the top of the 1eve.r there's a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle. When you let goof the paddle, the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop or return to the preset speed. Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer fluid leveloften. Remember, in freezing weather, don't use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. 2-43 ~ NOTICE: 0 When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid. 0 Fill your washer fluid tankonly 314 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Cruise Control (Option) If you have Cruise Control, the end of your multifunction lever will looklike this. With Cruise Control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise Control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 krdh). When you apply your brakes, the Cruise Control shuts off. 2-44 To Set Cruise Control I Move the Cruise Control switch to ON. Get up to the speed you want. Push in the set button at the end of the lever and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator peda.1. 2-45 To Resume a Set Speed Suppose you set your Cruise Control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the Cruise Control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the Cruise Control switch from ON to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and stay there. Remember, if you hold the switchat R/A longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switchor apply the brake. You could be startled and evenlose control. So unless you wantto go faster, don’t hold the switch atR/A. To Increase Speed WhileUsing Cruise Control There aretwo ways to go to a higher speed. Here’s thefirst: Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the button at the end of the lever, then release the button andthe accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. 2-46 Here’s the second way to go to a higher speed: get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control: a Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control 2-47 Using Cruise Controlon Hills How well your Cruise Control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of Cruise Control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use Cruise Control on steep hills. To Get Out of Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off theCruise Control: Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission OR; move the Cruise switch to OFF. To Erase Speed Memory When you turn off the Cruise Control or the ignition, your Cruise Control set speed memory is erased. 2-48 Headlights and Vehicle Lighting Your light switches are on the left side of your instrument panel. Push the left side of the switch with the parkinglights symbol on it to turn on: Parking Lights Sidemarker Lights Clearance Lights (if you have them) Taillights License Plate Lights Instrument Panel Lights Transfer Case ShiftIndicator Light (if you have one) Push the left side of the switch with the master lighting symbolon it to turn on all the lights listed above as well as the headlights. Push the right side of the switch with the off symbol on it to turn off your lights. Turn the dial at the right of the off switch to adjust instrument panel lights. Turning the dial all the wayup until it clicks turns on the interior lights. You can switch your headlights from high to low beam by pulling on the turn signal/high beam lever. A circuit breaker protects your headlights. If you have an electrical overload, your headlights will flicker on and off. Have your headlight wiring checked right away if this happens. 2-49 Headlights-On Reminder A buzzer will sound when your headlights are turned on and your ignitionis in OFF, LOCK or ACC. If you need to use your headlights when the ignition switch is in OFE LOCK or ACC, the buzzer can be turned offby turning the interior light switch dial all the way off. Daytime Running Lights(DRL) lndicator Light (Canada Only) If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada, you will have this lighton the instrument panel. It goes on whenever the Daytime Running Lights are on. Daytime Running Lights (CanadaOnly) The Canadian Federal Government has decided that “DaytimeRunning Lights” (DRL) are a useful feature, in that DRL can make your vehicle more visible to pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours. DRL are required on new vehicles sold in Canada. The high beam headlights willcome on at reduced brightnessin daylight when: 0 The ignition is on, The headlight switch is off, and The parking brake is released. When you turn on your headlights, the DRL will switch off and theexterior lights will come on. When you turn off the headlights, the exterior lights will go out and the high beams willchange to the reduced brightnessof DRL again. The DRL indicator light on the instrument panel willgo on whenever the DRL are on. This light means that only theDRL are on. When vou turn on your exterior lights, this light will go out. UT course, you may still turn on the headlights any timeyou need to. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake.The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. 2-50 Dome Lights The domelights will come on when you open the doors. You can also turn the dome lights on by turning the interior light dimmer dial all they way up until it clicks. If you have a Crew Cab, you can use the dome-lamp switch, located below the headlight switch, to set the dome lamps to come on automatically or remain off. To turn the lights off, justpress the side of the switch marked OFF. To return the lights to automatic operation, press the side marked AUTO. Reading Lights If your vehicle has reading lights, press the bar next to the light to turn the light on. Press the bar again to turn the light off. 2-51 If your vehicle has an overhead console with reading lights, they can be swiveled to point in the direction you want. To turn the light on, press the button next to the light with the master lighting switch symbol on it. Press the button again to turn the light off. Cargo Lamp with the cargo lamp symbol on it. The switch is below the main light switch.The interior light switch must be on or one of the doors open for the cargo lamp to work. 2-52 Underhood Reel Light If you have an underhood reel light, it is located inside the engine compartment on the passenger side fender. You can use it as a flashlight. To use the light, pull up on the lever and pull the light out. The cord will unreel as you pull the light. When you are done using the light, reel the cord back into the housing by turning the handle. Then, slide the light intothe holder. Press PUSH on thelever to hook the light intothe holder. Mirrors lnside Mirror Push or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce glare from headlights behind you after dark. Outside Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle, andhave a clear view ofobjects behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow doorways. Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors If you have electric mirrors, theycan be adjusted to point where you want from inside the vehicle. 2-54 I Select the mirror you I want to move by moving the center of the switch, located on the driver’s door armrest, to R (right) or L (left). Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where you want it. Convex Outside Mirror Your right side mirror may be convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Sun Visors To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows. 2-55 Your visor may have a strap to hold small items, such as maps. Some visors have an extender on the inside edge. When the visor is down, pull the extender out for extra glare coverage at the front or side. Some visors have mirrors with lights. If the mirror has lights, they will come on when you lift the mirror cover. 2-56 Cigarette Lighter/Ashtrays The frontashtray is located at thebottom of the instrument panel. Pull on the bottom of the ashtray door to open it. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. NOTICE: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do,it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element. To remove the front ashtray, pull on the front of the ashtray insert. Then slide the insert outof the ashtray door. To use a rear ashtray, if you have them, pull at the top of the ashtray door to flip the door open. To remove a rear ashtray, if you have them, press down on the inside tabs and open the door fully. 2-57 Don't put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage. Storage Compartments Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments provided for your convenience. Glove Box To open your glove box, press the button down and pull the door open. .: . ,.a Two cup depressions are provided for your convenience. 2-58 Center Floor Console Your vehicle may have aconsole compartment between the bucket seats. To open it, just squeeze the buttons on both sides of the keyhole, and pull up. Use your round key to lock this compartment. Your console also includes a handy place to hold cups. I Your console also has a cup holder that slides out, for the back seat passengers to use. 2-59 Instrument Panel Cup Holder If your vehicle has a full or split bench seat, you may have a cup holder attached to the instrument panel. To use the cup holder, pull the handleand slide the cup holder tray out untii it stops. Then, let the cup holder swing down into position. and slide the tray all the way in. 2-60 Center Overhead Console Your vehicle may have an overhead console. It has storage compartments inside it. Garage Door Opener Compartment If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener. To install the garage door opener, first open the compartment door by pressing the release button forward. 2-61 Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch. Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener, as close to the center of the opener as possible. Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button, and press theopener firmly into place. The pegs inside the compartment door are usedto make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the 8 $’<’ controlbutton on the garage door opener. 2-62 Add one peg at a time until the PUSH button on the compartment door operates the garage dooropener, with the compartment door closed, when you push the button marked PUSH. Now, with the compartment door closed, push the button marked PUSH again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly. With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place, you should only have to push the PUSH button slightly to operate theopener. Adjust the position of the garage dooropener and add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly. 2-63 Sung/asses Compartment The center overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store your sunglasses. To open the center compartment, press the release button located atthe rear of the compartment door. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. 2-64 Rear Compartment The rear compartment can be used to store a small item, like a book. To open the rear compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door. Other Storage Compartments Your vehicle features a number of storage compartments for convenient storage of often used items Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument panel. Use these spaces for items such as gloves or small books. 2-65 Some models have a storage pocket on each of the front doors. You can use the pocket to store a variety of small items. Some vehicles have a storage area behind the seat. 2-66 lnstument Panel 17 1.6 i5 i4 13 i2 1 . Side Window Defogger Vents 10. Glove Box 2. Light Controls 1 1 . Audio System 3. Air Vents 12. Ashtray 4. Multifunction Lever 13. Rear Window Defogger Switch 5. Tilt Lever 14. Air Vent Handles 6. Instrument Cluster 7. Gearshift Lever 15. Cargo Lamp Switch or Dome Light Override Switch 8. Audio System 16. FusePanel 9. Comfort Control System 17. Parking Brake Release Handle Instrument Cluster Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to knowto drive safely and economically. Tachometer Cluster If you have the tachometer cluster, it looks different but will tell you everything the standard cluster does, with the addition of displaying your engine’s revolutions per minute (rpm). 2-67 Speeaometer and Odometer I Your speedometerlets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odotneter shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the U.S.) or kilometers (used in Canada). Tamper-Resistant Odometer Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back. You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure that must be followed, so check with your state or provincial vehicle registration office. But generally,if the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can't, then it's set at zero, anda label must be put on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. 2-68 To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button located near thetrip odometer readout. If the reset button is not fully pressed,the trip odometer may not go all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero. Tachometer If you have a tachometer, it displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). I NOTICE: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, your engine or other parts could be damaged. Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered by your vehicle warranty. Warning Lightsand Indicators This section describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights go on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you turn the ignition keyjust to let you know they’re working. If you are fkmiliar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. 2-69 Gages can indicate when there may beor is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there’sa problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what todo about it. Please follow the manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights andgages. They’re a big help. Brake System Warning Light The red brake system warning light is located at the bottom right corner of the instrument cluster Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. Ifone part isn’t working, the other part can still work andstop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. Yotir vehicle also has rear-wheel anti-lock brakes. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem with either your regular or rear-wheel anti-lock brakes, or both. Have yourbrake system inspected right away. This light should come on as you start the vehicle. If it doesn’t come on thcn, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may takelonger to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 2-70 The brakesystem warning light will also comeon when you set your parking brake, and it will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fullv released, it means you have a brake problem. Water in Fuel Light The red Water in Fuel light, if you have one, is located near the middle right edge of the instrument cluster, just below the turn signal and lane change indicator. This light will come onto warn you if there is water in the diesel fuel system. For more information on how this light works, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the Index. 2-71 Service ThrottleSoon Light you have one, is located near the middle left edge of the instrument cluster On diesel engines, a computer monitors the operationof the electronic accelerator. This light should come on when the ignitionis on but theengine is not running, as a check to show you its working. If it does not come on at all, have itfixed right away. If thelight stays on after the engine starts or comes on while youare driving, the computer is indicating that youhave a problem. You should take your vehicle infor service soon. Glow Plugs Light The orange Glow Plugs light, if you have one, is located near the upper right corner of the instrument cluster. If you have a diesel engine, it has a special starting system.An instrument panel Glow Plugs light tells you when theengine is ready to be started. For more details, see “Starting Your Diesel Engine” in the Index. 2-72 Low Coolant Warning Light The orange Low Coolant Warning light, if you have one, is located in the upper left corner of the instrument cluster. If you have a diesel engine, you have a low coolant light. If this light comes on anytime the engine is running, your system is low oncoolant and the engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can. Charging System Warning Light The red Charging System Warning light is located at the umer The Charging System Warning light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, before starting the engine, as a check to show you it is working. After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a problem with the alternator drive belt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. 2-73 Malfunction Indicator (Service EngineSoon) Lamp SERVICE ENGINE SOON The orange Malfunction Indicator (Service Engine Soon) Lamp is located at the middle right edge of your instrument cluster. A computer monitors the operation of yourfuel, ignition and emission control systems. This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running, as a check to show you its working. If it does not come on at all, have it fixed right away. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, the computer is indicating that you have a problem. You should take your vehicle in for service soon. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy not run as smoothly. won’t be as good, and your engine may This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. 2-74 Check Gages Light The orangeCheck Gages light is located near the lower right corner of the This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be a problem with your oil pressure, coolant temperature, or some other problem. Check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your vehicle serviced right away. Daytime Running Lights(DRL) Indicator Light (Canada Only) The green Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Indicator light, if you have one, is located near the upper center of the instrument cluster. If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada, you will have this green light on the instrument panel. It will light whenever the Daytime Running Lights are on. For more details about DRL, see “Headlights and Vehicle Lighting’’ in this section. 2-75 c Shift lndicator Ljght The orange SHIFT Indicator light, if you have one, is located near the upperleft corner of the instrument cluster. This light, with the word SHIFT and the upshift arrow, is used on some models with manual transmissions. Dependingon your particular model, your vehicle may not have this light. The SHIFT indicator light will help you get the best fuel economy.See “Shift Light” or “Shift SpeedsVehicles Without Shift Light” in this section for more information. Headlight High BeamIndicator Light I The blue Headlight High Beam Indicator light is located near the middle leftedge of the instrument cluster. The high beam indicator is on whenever you use your high beam headlights. For more details about high beams, see “Headlight High-Low Beam” earlier in this section. 2-76 . Turn Signal and Lane Change lndicator Lights I The signal indicator will come on whenever you signal a Iurn or lane change. See “Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator”earlier in this section. 2-77 Gages Fuel Gage Standard Cluster -Gas Standard Cluster -Diesel DIESEL FUEL ONLY A I Tachometer Cluster -Gas Tachometer Cluster -Diesel The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible. Listed are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage: 0 At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. 0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was halffull, but it 2-78 actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. 0 The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition. None of these indicate a problem with the fuelgage. For information on how to fill your fuel tank, see “Fuel - Filling Your Tank” in the Index. For your fuel tank capacity, see “Fuel -Tank Capacity” in the Index. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, about 260” F (145 C) or more, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible. O Hot Coolant Can Burn You Badly! In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See“Engine Overheating” in the index. 2-79 Oil Pressure Gage Standard Cluster -Gas Standard Cluster -Diesel 30 ,"p,.,i.." Tachometer Cluster -Gas Tachometer Cluster -Diesel The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. 2-80 A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or otherproblem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. NOTICE: Damage to your enginefrom neglected oil problems canbe costly and is not covered by your warranty. 2-81 Voltmeter Tachometer Standard Cluster Cluster 14 I When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (in the RUN Position), this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warningzone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories, and have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Center High Mount StopLamp (CHMSL) .. . 2-82 If equipment such as a cap orcamper is installed, a wire labeled “Center High Mount Stop lamp (CHMSL) feed” is provided along the left rear frame rail. This wire should be used to connect a CHMSL on the cap orcamper. Camper Wiring Harness (Option) An optional 5-wire harness is stored in the front stake pocket on the driver’s side of the bed. The harness has no connector, and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician. It must be routed out of your vehicle and securely attached so that it won’t be pulled or rubbed while you’re using it. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. Trailer Wiring Harness (Option) An optional 7-wire harness is stored under your vehicle along the rear frame crossmember. The harness has a 30 amp. in-line fused battery feed wire and no connector, and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician. Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring won’t bind or break when turning with the trailer, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. 2-83 Step-Bumper Pad If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be equipped with a rear step pad at the center of the bumper. Use this pad to improve footing when you are stepping on the bumper step. If you will be using the bumper to tow a trailer, you must remove the center cutout circle to install the trailer ball. You must also remove both outer cutouts to attach the trailer safety chains. To remove the pad, lift the edge of the pad from the rear of the bumper and swing it forward. When the pad releases from the bumper holes, lift the pad off. 2-84 Comfort Controlsand Audio Systems Section . In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offeredwith your vehicle . Be sureto read about the particular system suppliedwith your vehicle. For explanationof vehicle symbols in this section. refer to “Vehicle Symbols” in the Introduction . Comfort Control System Flow-Through Ventilation System ........................... 3-2 Heating System (Without Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Electronic Heating/Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Rear Window Defogger ................................... 3-8 ............................................. 3-9 Audiosystems FMStereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 AMStereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 How to Operate Your AM ETR@Radio ...................... 3-11 How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System and Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System and Cassette Deck with Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 .......................... Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3-1 3-20 3-21 Comfort Controls Flow-Through Ventilation System Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. I With the side windows closed, air will flow into the front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle and out therear air exhaust valves. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when theheater or the air conditioning fan is running, unless your optionalair conditioner is in the MAX mode. For more information see “MAX Button” in this section. Ventilation Tips 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will workfar better, reducing thechance of fogging the inside of your windows. When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blowerfan to HI for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside of your windows. e Keep the air path under thefront seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle. 3-2 Air Vents If your vehicle does not have airconditioning, there are air vents below the instrument panel. Use the handles below your steering wheel, with the vent symbols on them, to open and close the vents. If your vehicle has air conditioning, you will find air vents in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel. You can move the vents grilles from side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air, or close the vents altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the flow of air coming out of any vents that are open. 3-3 Heater Output Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, it is equipped with an engine coolant heater. An engine coolant heater is optional on gas engine vehicles. You can use an engine coolantheater during initial start-up in cold weather (20” F, -8” C, or lower) to help heat the passenger compartment faster. Because an engine coolantheater warms the engine coolant, your vehicle’s heating system can provide some heat as soon as you start the engine. The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces thetime it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature,and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output. For more information, See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Diesel Engine If you idle your diesel engine for a long time when it’s cold outside, your heater may blow out cool air. This is normal. When you increase the engine speed, your heater should blow out warmer air. If it doesn’t, your coolant level may be low. See “Engine Coolant”in the Index to find out how to check your coolant level. 3-4 Heating System (Without Air Conditioning) I If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, this is what your heating system will look like. Function Lever The upper lever on the control panelcan be moved to three different heating functions. Vent (Left): Air comes out at the vents on your instrument panel and at your front side windows. Heater (Center):Air comes out near the floor. This setting, along with a heat setting, is best for cold weather. Defrost (Right):This setting operates the defroster. Air comes out near the bottom of thewindshield and at your front side windows. Use this setting, along with a heat setting, when you get fog or ice on the windshield. Placing the lever between poslrlons sends air outboth vents. Temperature Lever The lower lever on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. Move the lever right toward "+" for warmer air. Move the lever left toward for cooler air. "-" Fan ControlKnob The knob on the right side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase the air flow, turn the knob toward "+". To decrease the air flow, turn it toward "-". 3-5 Electronic Heating/Air ConditioningSystem If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air conditioning system will look like this. When you first turn on your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the windows to clear the vehicle of hot air. Using the MAX button can also help. See “MAX Button” in this section for more information, Function Display Your system has a lighted display showing each system when it is operating. During normal operation, all the lights won’t come on at the same time. Only the ones displaying the current settings will light. 3-6 Temperature Selector Bar The bar under your system display lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. Press COLD for cooler air and press HOT for warmer air. Release the bar when the system reaches the temperature you want. The temperature is shown on the display by the arrow moving between C and H. Air Controls (BLEND) The twobuttons to the right of the system display control the air flow. You can blend the air flow to suit your needs. The amount of blending is shown on the display by an arrow moving between the figure’s feet (floor air flow) and head (vent air flow). Left Button Vent (Top):Press the top of this button and the air flow will come through the instrument panel vents. Heater (Bottom):Press the bottom of this button and theair flow will come through the floor outlet. The air flow can be blended between the two positions. To blend between positions press the side of the button showing the area where you would like more air flow. The system will automatically begin to blend toward the position chosen. To stop the system between positions, just press the SAME side of the button again. Right Button Defrost (Top): This setting operates the defroster. Air comes out near the bottom of the windshield and atyour front side windows. Use this setting, along with a heat setting, when you get fog or ice on the windshield. Heater (Bottom):Press the bottom of this button and air comes out near the floor. This setting, along with a heat setting, is best for passenger comfort in cold weather. The air flow can be blended between the two positions. To blend between positions, press the side of the button showing the area where you would like more air flow. The system will automatically begin to blend toward the position chosen. To stop the system between positions, just press the SAME side of the button again. 3-7 A/C Button Press the button marked A/C to turn your air conditioner on and off.The A/C symbol will light on your display and air will come out of your instrument panel vents. The fan will automatically be set on LOW. When you press the A/C button to turn the air conditioner off, the system will operate in the vent mode. Whenyou turn the air conditioner back on, the system will operate in the mode that you last selected unless the OFF button was pressed. MAX Button If you press theMAX button, the air in your vehicle will be recirculated. With the air conditioner on, MAX will give you maximum cooling. It can also be used in all modes tohelp keep dust out of your vehicle. When MAX is selected, REC will light on your display. If your air conditioner developshigh system pressure, it will automatically go into theMAX mode and REC will light on your display. The A/C system will remain in the MAX mode, even if you press the MAX button, until system pressure returns to a normal level. Fan Control Button This button is in the upper right corner of your system control panel. The fan has four settings - low, medium low, medium high andhigh. Press the top of the button “+” to increase the air flow. Press the bottom of the button “-” to decrease theair flow. The setting you select is shown on your display as LOW, MED LOW, MED HI or HI. OFF Button Press this button to turn the air conditioning/heating system off. Pressing OFF will erase the present mode of operation from the system’s memory. Outside air will stillcome out of the heater outlet whenever the vehicle is moving forward. If the OFF button was pressed, you must press A/C, MAX, or oneof the BLEND buttons forthe system to come back on. Rear Window Defogger You can tell if your vehicle has this option by looking at the rear window. If you see lines running across the glass, you have it. Theseare the conductive wire-like elel nts which heat your window. 3-8 NOTICE: Scraping the insideof your rear window could cut and damage the defogger. Your warranty would notcover this damage. And, don’t put decals there, you might have to scrape off. them For best results, clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible first. To turn on the rear window defogger, find the switch marked REAR DEFOG on your instrument panel, just below the heater system. Press the right side of the switch, with the defog symbol on it, until the light in the switch comes on, then release it. The rear window defogger will only work if the ignitionswitch is turned to RUN. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the left, lighted side of the switch. The defogger will shut itself offafter several minutes, so that the glass does not get too hot. If the defogger shuts off, and the window still isn’t clear, turn the defogger on again. Audio Systems Your Delco@ audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco@system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Be awarethat hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. To help avoid hearing loss or damage: 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. 0 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. 3-9 FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals can only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). And, tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noisefrom things like electrical storms and power lines. If the noise interferes with your listening, try reducing the treble to lessen the noise. AM Stereo This means the Delco@system can receive C-QUAM@ stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo, though some do not. If your Delco@ system can get C-QUAM@, your “STEREO” light will come on when you’re receiving it. (C-QUAM@ is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc.). NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephoneor two-way radio - be sure you can add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@radio or other systems, and even damage them. And, yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. 3-10 HOW to Onerate Your AM ETR@Radio To Play the Radio Press the PWR-VOL-TONE knob to switch the radio on and off. This knob does two otherthings: It controls the volume. Rotate the VOL knob clockwise to increases the volume. The knob behind the PWR-VOL knob is the TONE knob. Rotate this knob clockwise for more treble and counterclockwise for more bass. TUNE Button Press the side of the button with the down arrow to decrease the radio station frequency or the side of the buttonwith the up arrow to increasethe radio station frequency. Pushbuttons The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. Just: Tune in the station you want. Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few seconds), Within 5 seconds, press one of'the five pushbuttons to store the station. Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. 3-11 How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System and Cassette Deck To Play The Radio Press the amber PWR button to switch the radio on and off. RCL Button When the ignition is off, press the RCL button to display the time. With the ignition in RUN or ACC, press RCL to recall the radio station frequency and volume setting when the time display isshowing. After a few seconds, the readout will return to the time display. SEEK Button Press the SEEK button to make the receiver seek, and stop at, the next higher available station. SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to make the receiver scan, and momentarily pause at, all available stations. SCAN will appear in the electronic display while the receiver is in the scan mode. Press SCAN again to cancel the scanmode and hold the current station. AM-FM Button Press the AM-FM button to switch betweenAM and FM. 3-12 - . VOL Button The VOL button controls thevolume. Pressing VOL "+" increases volume; VOL "-"decreases volume. TUNE Button To tune in radio stations, press theTUNE button. TUNE "+" increases radio station frequency; TUNE "-"decreases radiostation frequency. BASS Button Press theBASS button to adjust the bass level. BASS "+" increases the bass; BASS "-"decreases bass. Adjust the TREB and BASS buttons to give apleasing sound. If a station is weak and noisy, adjust the TREB button to reduce the noise. TREBLE Button Press the TREB button to adjust the treble level. TREB "+" increases the treble; TREB "-"decreases treble. BAUFADE Buttons To balance and fade thesound between the lefuright or fronthear speakers, use the four buttonswith the speakersymbols on them. Press theleft and right buttons to adjust the left and right speaker balance.Pressing the top and bottom buttons adjusts the front and rear speaker volume balance, or fade. Therelative balance and fade adjustments areshown on the electronic display. Pushbuttons The six pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. You can set the pushbuttons forup to twelve favorite stations (6 AM and 6 FM). To set the pushbuttons, just: Tune in the station you want. Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few seconds.) Within 5 seconds, push one of the six pushbuttons to store the station. After that, whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. 3-13 Clock To set the clock, just: Press the SET button, The word SET will light up in the electronic display. 0 Within 5 seconds, press and hold the SEEK button until the correct hour appears on the display. Then, press and hold the SCAN button until the correct minute appears on the display. 0 After you set the time, the word SET will remain in the electronic display for a few seconds. Cassette Deck If you have a cassette deck, it is built to work best with tapes thatare 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin that they may not work well in this player. Press the PWR button on the radio to turn the system on. The radio will play until a cassette is pushed into the cassette entry door (the tape side goes in first.) Once the tape is playing, use the radio control buttonsfor volume, tone, balance and fade, just asyou do for the radio. The arrows on the player indicate which side of the tape is being played. 3-14 PROG To go from oneside of the tape to the other, press the PROG button. Observe the lighted arrows to determine which side of the tape is being played. If a tape is inserted with side “1” (or “A”) up, then the up arrow means that that side is being played. Likewise, a down arrow would indicate that side “2” (or “B”) had been selected. The player will automatically switch to the other side of the tape when the first side ends. REV To rapidly rewind the tape, press the REV button. The tape will rapidly rewind until you press either the PROG or EJCT button. If the beginning of the tape is reached while in the REV mode, play will resume on the same side of the tape. FWD To rapidly advance the tape, press the FWD button. The tape will rapidly advance until you press either the PROG or EJCT button. If the end of the tape is reached while in the FWD mode, the tape will change direction, and play will resume on the opposite side of the tape. EJCT Press the EJCT button to eject the cassette tape from the player (the radio will then play). 3-15 How to OperateYour AM-FM Stereo Audio System and Cassette Deck with Equalizer To PIay The Radio Press the amber PWR button to switch the radio on and off. RCL Button When the ignition is off, press the RCL button to display the time. With the ignition in RUN or ACC, press RCL to recall the radio station frequency and volume setting when the time display is showing. Aftera few seconds, the readout will returnto the time display. SEEK Button Press the SEEK button to make the receiver seek, and stop at,the next higher available station. SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to make the receiver scan, and momentarily pause at, all available stations. SCAN will appear in the electronic display while the receiver is in the scan mode. Press SCAN again to cancel the scan mode and hold the current station. 3-16 A M - m Button Press the AM-FM button to switch between AM and FM. Stereo (AM) Your Delco@radio can receive C-QUAM@ stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo, though some do not. If your Delco@system can get C-QUAM@ signals, your STEREO light will come on when you are receiving stereo. (C-QUAM@ is a registered trademark of Motorola Inc.). VOL Button The VOL button controls the volume. Pressing VOL "+" increases volume; VOL "-"decreases volume. TUNE Button To tune in radio stations, press the TUNE button. TUNE "+" increases radio station frequency; TUNE "-"decreases radio station frequency. BAUFADE Buttons To balance and fade the sound between the leftlright or fronthearspeakers, use the four buttons with the speaker symbols on them. Press the left and right buttons to adjust the left and right speaker balance. Pressing the top and bottom buttons adjusts the front and rear speaker volume balance, or fade. The relative balance and fade adjustments are shown on the electronic display. Pushbuttons The six pushbuttons let you return tofavorite stations. You can set the pushbuttons for up to twelve favorite stations (6 AM and 6 FM). To set the pushbuttons, just: Tune in the station you want. Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few seconds.) Within 5 seconds, push one of the six pushbuttons to store the station. After that, whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. 3-17 Clock To set the clock, just: Press the SET button. The word SET will light up in the electronic display. a Within 5 seconds, press and hold the SEEK button until the correct hour appears on the display. a Then, press and hold the SCAN button until the correct minute appears on the display. e After you set the time, the word SET will remain in the electronic display for a few seconds. Cassette Deck with Graphic Equalizer If you have a cassette deck, it is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin that they may not work well in this player. Press the PWR button on the radio to turn the systemon. The radio will play until a cassette is pushed into the cassette entry door (the tape side goes in first.) Once the tape is playing, use the radio control buttons for volume,balance and fade, just as you do for the radio. The arrows on the player indicate which side of the tape is being played. 3-18 Graphic Equalizer The graphic equalizer lets you fine tunebass, mid-range and treble frequencies to your individual taste. The unit has five separate adjustable frequency ranges. To emphasize a frequency, press the topof the button “+” and to de-emphasize a frequency, press the bottom of the button “-”. It’s best to begin with all the controls in the middle position, then adjust each control as you like. Observe the electronic display for relative frequency emphasis. Cr02 Button For better sound when playing high bias chrome ormetal tapes, press the Cr02 button. The light in the button willbe on while the player is in the Cr02 mode. When playing standard tapes, you will get better sound while in the standard mode. If the Cr02 button is lit, press it to return the player to standard mode (the light will go out). PROG Button To go from one sideof the tape to the other, pressthe PROG button. Observe the lighted arrows to determine which side of the tape is being played. If a tape is inserted with side “ 1” (or “A”) up, then the up arrowmeans that that side is being played. Likewise, a down arrow would indicate that side “2” (or “B”) had been selected. The player will automatically switch to the other side of the tape when the firstside ends. EJECT Button Press the EJECT button to eject the cassette tape from the player (the radio will then play.) TAPE The up arrow and down arrow, below the wordTAPE on the cassette deck, let you know which side of the tape is currently playing. For more information, see PROG in this section. FWD Button To rapidly advance the tape, press the FWD button. The light in the button will be lit and the tape will rapidly advance until you press the PROG button or press the FWD button again. If the end of the tape is reached while in the FWD mode, the tape will change direction, and play will resume on the opposite side of the tape. 3-19 SEEK Button To search for the next selection on the tape, press the SEEK button. The light in the SEEK button will belit and the player will seek the beginning of the next selection. For the seek mode to stop at the next selection, there must be at least a &second gap between selections on the tape. REV Button To rapidly rewind the tape, press the REV button. The light in the button will be lit and the tape will rapidly rewind until you press the PROG button or press the REV buaon again. If the beginning of the tape is reached while in the REV mode, play will resume on the same side of the tape. REPT Button Press the REPT button to repeat the currently playing selection on the tape. For the REPT mode to repeat a selection, there must be at least a 4-second gap between selections on the tape. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can result in reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged player mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their plastic cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or cause failure of the tape player. As regular maintenance, your tape player should be cleaned each month or after every 15 hours of use. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. Clean your tape player with a wiping-action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette, and follow the directions provided with it. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. 3-20 Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check every oncein a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender. 3-21 Notes 3-22 Your Driving and the Road Section ...:/( .. Here you'll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions . We've also included many other useful tips on driving . Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Control of a Vehicle ..................................... . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Braking Steering Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4-24 DrivingatNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 CityDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 4-29 Freeway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Powerwinches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 PowerTake-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-38 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a veryimportant safety device in your Vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless andmake mistakes. Anticipate what they mightdo. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city andrural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol takes away three things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol - a driver, a passenger or someone else, such as a pedestrian, had been drinking. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking anddriving. About 20,000 motor vehicle-related deaths occur each year because of alcohol, and thousands of people are injured. Just how much alcohol is too much if a person plansto drive? Ideally, no one should drink alcohol and then drive. But if one does, then what’s “too much”? It can be a lot less than many might think. Althoughit depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Content (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: How much alcohol is in the drink. The drinker’s body weight. The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking. The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. 4-2 According to the American Medical Association, a 180-pound (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinkingwill have aslightly lower BAC level. 3 HOURS 2 HOURS NUMBER OF DRINKS (as in picture) 1 HOUR The law in most U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In Canada the limit is 0.08percent, and in some other countriesit’s lower than that. The BAC will be over 0.10 percentafter three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. 4-3 But it’s very important to keep in mind that the abilityto drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levelsabove 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in an accident increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent (three beers in one hour for a 180-pound or 82 kg person) has doubled his or her chance of having an accident. At a BAC level of0.10 percent, the chance of that driver having an accident is six times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chances are twenty-five times greater! And, the body takesabout an hour to rid itselfof the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with a higher BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse. That’s especially truefor brain, spinal cord and heart injuries. That means that if anyone who has beendrinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, the chance of being killedor permanently disabled is higher than if that person had not been drinking. And we’ve already seen that the chance of a crash itself is higher for drinking drivers. 4-4 Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easyto ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide.That means you can lose control of your vehicle. Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide topush on the brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others isimportant. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; and the condition of your brakes. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much fdster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. 4-5 If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harderto push. Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle has an advancedelectronic braking system that canhelp you keep it under control. When you start your vehicle and begin to drive away, you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise. The ABS motor comes on momentarily when the vehicle reaches 8 mph (12 km/h). And you mayeven notice that your brake pedal moves a little while thisis going on. This is the ABS system testing itself. Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animaljumps outin front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. A computer senses that the rear wheels are slowing down. If one of the rear wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will work the brakes atthe rear wheels. It is programmed to make the mostof available tire and road conditions. 4-6 As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on rear wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal. If you get too close to the vehicle infront of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. To Use Anti-Lock Use rear-wheel anti-lock like regular brakes. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise outside your vehicle, but this is normal. Let anti-lock work for you, but remember: Your front wheels can still stop rolling. If that happens, release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again so that you can steer. With the four-wheel drive option, you won’t have anti-lock braking when you shift into four-wheel drive. But you will have regular braking. When you shift back into two-wheel drive, you will have anti-lock again. Braking in Emergencies At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation that requires hard braking. You have the rear-wheel anti-lock braking system. Your front wheels can stop rolling when you brake very hard. Once they do, the vehicle can’t respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the front wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic. 4-7 So, use a “squeeze” braking technique. This will give you maximum braking while maintaining steering control. You do this by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure. Whenyou do, it will help maintain steering control. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Sfeering If you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips Driving onCurves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to thesame laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction,inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get ina curve aepends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control systems - steering and braking- have to do their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the hard braking can demand too much at those places. You can lose control. The samething can happen if you’re steering through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two control systems - steering and acceleration - can overwhelm those places where the tiresmeet the road and make you lose control. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. 4-8 If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the problem. Your Vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes, but not enough to lock your front wheels. It is betterto remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. R The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-9 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to 114 turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. 1. Edge of Road Surface 2. SlowDown 3. Left Approx. Quarter Turn 4. Recover Passing The driverof a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver faceto face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever aboutmaking a successful pass, wait for abetter time. 4-10 Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing theroad ahead is clear). Never cross asolid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. Do not get too closeto the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closelyreduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following alarger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate spaceif the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonabledistance. 0 When it looks like a chanceto pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start’’ that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance overyour shoulder and check the blind spot. 0 Check your mirrors , glance overyour shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enoughahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane changesignal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lights are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driverto get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a littleto the right. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving expertssay about what happens when the three control systems(brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet theroad to do what the driverhas asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. 4-11 Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive driversavoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your Vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicleto go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changescould cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface”- and slow down whenyou have any doubt. Remember: The rear-wheel anti-lock braking system (RWAL) helps avoid only a rear braking skid. In a braking skid (where thefront wheels are no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the brakes to get thefront wheels rolling again. This restores steering control. Push the brake pedaldown steadily when you haveto stop suddenly. As long as the front wheels are rolling, you will have steering control. 4-12 Driving Guidelines Off-Road Driving with Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive. Also, see “Anti-lock Brakes” in the Index. If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level, solid surface. Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short, you’ve gone right back to nature. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. Before You Go Off-Roading There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. 0 The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can. 0 Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. 4- 13 You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index. TraveNng to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly. Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly. Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here’s what wemean. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or enginesounds. With your arms, hands, feet, and body you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the bestways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds: you approach thingsfaster and you have less timeto scan the terrain for obstacles. 0 you have less time to react. 0 you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles. 0 you’ll need more distance for braking,especially since you’reon an unpaved surface. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider. Surface Conditions.Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances. Surface Obstacles.Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them.Often these obstaclesare hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider: 0 0 Is the path ahead clear? Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? 0 Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.) 0 Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? 4- 15 When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your handsif you’re not prepared. When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertnessfrom driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. Andthis is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious - or even fatal - accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. (See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.) Driving OnOff-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of whatyour vehicle can and can’t do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,no matter how well built the vehicle. Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill,for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easilysee all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of thehill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. 4- 16 Here are someother things to consider as you approach a hill. 0 Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? 0 Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? 0 Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers? 0 Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)? 0 What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get outand walk the hill if you don’t know. It’sthe smart way to find out. Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. Driving Uphi// Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding. Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. 0 Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill. 0 Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. 0 Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there. 0 Use your headlights even during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic. 4- 17 Q: What shouldI do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, andI can’t A: make it up the hill? If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do. First, here’s what you should do: Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. If your engine isstill running, shift the transmission into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill inreverse. 0 If your enginehas stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to “P” (Park) (or, shift to “N” (Neutral) if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hillas straight as possible in reverse. As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’sbest that you back down the hillwith your wheels straight rather than in theleft or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the leftor right will increase the possibility of a rollover. Here aresome things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill. Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into “N“ (Neutral) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control. 4-18 Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. 0 Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill. ~ I just Q: Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the hill and decide can’t do it.What should I do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in “P” (Park) (or the manual transmission in first gear) , and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to “ N ’ (Neutral) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things: 0 How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? 0 What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? 0 Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? 0 What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bQttom with large rocks? 4- 19 If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t haveto doall the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. Q: Are there some thingsI should not do when driving downa hill? A: Yes! These areimportant because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident. e When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you acrossthe incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down. 0 Never go downhill with the transmission in “N” (Neutral) , or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift . This is called “free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade. 0 Avoid braking so hard that you lock the front wheels when going downhill. If your front wheels are locked, you can’t steer your vehicle. If your wheels lock up during downhill braking, you may feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways. To regain your direction, just ease off the brakes and steer to keep the front of the vehicle pointingstraight downhill. Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? A: It’s much more likelyto happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. 0 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking brake. 0 Shift to T“ (Park) (or to Neutral with the manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart the engine. 0 Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down. 0 If the engine won’t start, get out and get help. 4-20 Driving Across an Incline Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probably go across theincline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider: 0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steepto drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the leftand right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving acrossan incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhillslide or a rollover. 0 Surface conditions canbe a problem when you drive across ahill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, itcan hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over. 0 Hidden obstacles can make the steepnessof the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle cantilt even more. For reasonslike these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because thetrail goes across theincline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the course’’ so you know what the surface islike before you drive it. 4-21 Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get outon the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you’ll be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving In Mud, Sand, Snow, Or Ice When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turningis more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances. It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck. When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. Butit will depend upon how loosely packed thesand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sanddunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction. 4-22 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces, it’s very easy tolose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control. Driving In Water Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before youdrive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, don’t try it - you probably won’t get through. Also, waterthat deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop. If you have a diesel engine, see “Driving Through Water (Diesel Engines)” in the Index for more information on driving through water. 4-23 After OH-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collectedon the underbody, chassisor under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleanedand checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling systemfor any leakage. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous thanday driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Here are some tips on night driving. 0 Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlights behind you. 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles. 0 Slow down, especially on higher speed roads,.Your headlights can light up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. 4-24 Night Vision No one can seeas well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do inthe daytimecan also affect your night vision. For example. if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlights, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching lights. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlights light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlights should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light -and aren’t even aware of it. 4-25 Driving inthe Rain Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as goodas on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise-to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement. The heavierthe rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled, Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts. 4-26 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It canhappen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or othervehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. 4-27 Some Other Rainy WeatherTips 0 Turn on your low-beam headlights - not just your parking lights - to help make you more visible to others. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) City Driving One of the biggest problems with citystreets is the amount of trafficon them. You’ll want to watchout for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. 0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next section, “Freeway Driving.”) 0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. 4-28 Freeway Driving -w .... *” . Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But theyhave their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic ana keep to the right. Drive atthe same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Tryto merge into the gap atclose to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly withthe traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or tothe prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the rightlane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. 4-29 Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’reready. Try to be wellrested. If you must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go.If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in Vehicle dealerships all across North America. Thev’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are somernings you can check before atrip: Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked all levels? Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? / Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is somethingabout an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the droneof the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a secund, and you could crash and be injured. 4-30 What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are sometips: 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pull offthe road into a rest, service, or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. Hill and MountainRoads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are sometips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about driving off-road.) Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do someof the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. 4-31 a Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and , and you can climb the hill better. a Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. 0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. 4-32 - . Winter Driving Here are sometips for winter driving: 0 Have your Vehicle in good shape for winter. Be sure your engine coolant mix is correct. 0 You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet ora couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places whereyour tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and theroad, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. 4-33 What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get “wet ice’’ when it’s about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not to breakthe fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See **Anti-lock”in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. 4-34 - If You're Caught ina Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you've been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing orwrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body insulators from newspapers, burlapbags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engineto keep warm, but be careful. Open a windowjust a little on the side of the vehicle that's away from the wind.This will helpkeep CO out. 4-35 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlights. Let the heater runfor awhile. If you havea diesel engine, you may haveto run it at a higher speed to get enough heat. Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Start theengine again and repeat thisonly when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only useit when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. NOTICE: When operatinga power winch on your vehicle, always leave the transmission in"N" (Neutral). Leaving a automatic transmission in "P" (Park) while using a power winch may damage the transmission. Also, leaving an automatic or manual transmission in gear while using a power winch may damage the transmission. Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake,or block the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling. 4-36 Power Take-Off (PTO) NOTICE: If you will be using the PTO while the vehicle remains in one place, drive the vehicle to warm it up before operating the PTO. Don’t use the PTO for more than four hourswithout driving your vehicle again. If you don’t follow these guidelines, your transfer case or transmission could bedamaged. I NOTICE: Don’t have a PTO that will exceed35 horsepower installed on your vehicle. It could damage your transmission or transfer case. Before using a power take-off, refer to the manufacturer’s or installer’s instructions. To engage a power take-off: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into “ N ’ (Neutral). 3. Hold the clutch pedal down and engage the power take-off. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the transfer case into the range you want (if you have four-wheel drive), apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 4. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you normally would. When you release the clutch, the power take-off will start. Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off (Manual Transmission) I . Set the parking brake. 2 . Shift the transfer case into “N” (Neutral). 3. Hold the clutch pedal down. If the vehicle will remain in the same place, shift the transmission into the highest gear. 4. Engage the power take-off. 4-37 If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the transfer case into the range you want, apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) asyou normally would. When you release the clutch, the power take-off will start. Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off (Automatic Transmission) 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Shift the transfer case into “N” (Neutral). 3. Shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral). 4. Engage the power take-off. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transfer case into the range you want. Then apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission to “D” (Drive) to start the power take-off. 6. Release the regular brakes to drive the vehicle. Towing a Trailer NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section, and see your Vehicle dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. 4-38 Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If it was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heaviertrailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. I f You Do Decide Tu Pull A Trailer If you do, here are some important points. 0 There are many different laws having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police. 0 Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 4,000 pounds (1 800 kg) orless. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 4,000 pounds (1 800 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged. 0 Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Three important considerationshave to do with weight: Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed,altitude, road grades, outside temperatureand how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. You can ask your dealer forour trailering information or advice, oryou can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet. In Canada, write to General Motorsof Canada Limited, Customer Assistance Center, 1908Colonel Sam Drive, Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7. 4-39 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or grossweight of your vehicle. The gross vehicle weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. A B If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a “weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your vehicle. Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a fewreasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: If you use a step bumper hitch, and your trailer tongue has a V-shaped foot, your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Check the distance 4-40 from the front edge of the foot to the middle of the hitch ball socket. If the distance is less than 12 inches, take the foot off the trailer tongue. If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 4,000 pounds ( 1 8 14 kg) be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving. Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Your trailer brake system can tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, but consider the following: Will the trailer brake system use more than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder? If it will, don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system. Both braking systems won’t work well, and you could even lose your brakes altogether. Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not be used with your vehicle. If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at the port onthe master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. if you do, it will bend and finally breakoff. Use steel brake tubing. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself. 4-41 Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform, safety chains, electrical connector, lights, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making Turns When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. Turn Signals When Towinga Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanesor stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. 4-42 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 k m h ) to reduce thepossibility of engine and transmission overheating. When towing at high altitude with steep uphill grades,you need to consider the following information. The lower atmospheric pressure at high altitude allows your vehicles engine coolantto boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you immediately turn your engine off after towing at high altitude with steep uphill grades, yourvehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let your vehicle operate in a parked position with the transmission in “N” (Neutral) for a few minutes before you turn off the engine. If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating”in the Index. If you have an automatic transmission,you should use “D” (or, as you need to, a lower gear)when towing atrailer. Operating your vehicle in “D” when towing atrailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission. If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use fifth gear. Just drive in fourth gear(or, as you need to, a lower gear). Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. People canbe injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into “ P ’ (Park) yet, or in gear for amanual transmission. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorbthe load. 4. Re-apply the regular brakes.Then apply your parking brake,and then shift to “P” (Park), or“R” (Reverse) for amanual transmission. 5 . If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a “N” (Neutral). 6. Release the regularbrakes. drive gear-not in 4-43 A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in “P” (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. I If you have four-wheel drive andyour transfer case is in “N” (Neutral), your vehicle will befree to roll, evenif your shift lever is in ccP’9(Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -not in “N” (Neutral). If you are parking on a hill, or if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Parking On Wills” in the Index. I When You Are Ready to Leave After Parkingon a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: Start your engine; Shift into a gear; and Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight. Trailer Light Wiring See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index. 4-44 Problems on the Road Section Here you’ll find what to do aboutsome problems that can occuron the road . ..................................... 5-2 5-3 Other Warning Devices ...................................... 5-3 Jumpstarting .............................................. TowingYourVehicle ........................................ 5-7 Engine Overheating ........................................ 5-11 Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 If a Tire GoesFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 5-29 Jackstorage ........................................... 5-29 SpareTire ............................................. If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ..................... 5-40 Hazard Warning Flasher 5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers 1 3 Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lights will flashon and off. But they won’t flash if you’re braking. Press the button in to make your front and rear turn signals flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, pull out on the collar. When the hazard warningflashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. 5-2 Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to warn others. Set oneup at the sideof the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please followthe steps below to do it safely. Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your vehicle warranty. Trying to startyour vehicle bypushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, evenif you have a manual transmission. And if you have an automatic transmission, it won’t start that way. 5-3 To Jump Start Your Vehicle 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. NOTICE: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. If you have a dieselengine vehicle with two batteries (or more),you should know before you begin that, especially in cold weather, you may not be able to get enough power from a single battery inanother vehicle to start your diesel engine. If your vehicle has more than one battery, use the battery that’son the passenger side of the vehicle- this will reduce electrical resistance. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicle’s aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems. You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “ P ’ (Park) or a manual transmission in “N” (Neutral). If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in “N” (Neutral). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio! NOTICE: If you leaveyour radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. 5-4 5. Check that the jumpercables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. 5-5 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Usea remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Good Battery (+) Dead Battery (+) 7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) cable. Don’t let theother end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative cable doesn ’r go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery. Good Battery (-) Heavy Metal Engine Part 5-6 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine partsthat move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile. 11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Remove Cables in this Order: 2 3 1 . HeavyMetal Engine Part 2. Good Battery (-) 3. Good Battery (+) 4. Dead Battery (+) 12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. Towing Your Vehicle Try to have your GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right equipment and know how to tow it without damage. If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new, by adding such things like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could be damaged during towing. Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. 5-7 When you call, tell the towing service: That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has the four-wheel drive option. The make, model, and year of your vehicle. Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and transfer case, if you have one. If there was an accident, what was damaged. When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission and transfer case, if you have one, should bein Neutral and the parking brake released. 5-8 Towing From the Front If you have a two-wheel drive vehicle, don’t have your vehicle towed on the rear wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the rear wheels, don’t go more than 35 mph (56 km/h) or farther than 50 miles (80 km) or your transmission will be damaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then the rear wheels have to be supported on a dolly. If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option and the transfer case is engaged, a dolly must be used under the rear wheels when towing from the front . 5-9 Towing From the Rear NOTICE: Towing pickup models from the rear while loaded with heavy cargo may cause the frame side rails to flex sufficiently to allow to the the pickup box to contact the cab and could cause damage cab and/or box. 5-10 Engine Overheatina You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle instrument panel. If you have adiesel engine, you will also find alow coolant light on your instrument panel. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine I NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 5- 11 /f No Steam /sComing From Your Engjne If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and openthe window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to “ N ’ (Neutral). If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to besafe, drive slower for about ten minutes. If the warning doesn’tcome back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, push the acceleratoruntil the engine speed is about twice as fast asnormal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning,TURN OFF THE ENGINE AND GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE VEHICLE until it cools down. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 5-12 Cooling System -Gas Engines When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see: A. Coolant recovery tank B. Engine fan(s) C. Radiator pressure cap If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. The coolantlevel should be at or above the COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. F 5-13 NOTICE: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off theengine. How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but thecoolant level isn’t at or above the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and a proper antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.) 5-14 I NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or abovethe COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there's one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but besure the cooling system is cool before you do it. 5-15 5-16 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 5-17 3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base of thefiller neck. 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD mark. 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 5-18 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s). 7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on pressure cap line up like this. 5-19 Cooling System -Diesel Engines When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see: A. Coolant surge tank pressure cap B . Engine fan(s) C. Radiator t A CAUTION: If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary electric fan start up even when the engine is not running under the hood can and can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. The coolant level should be slightly above the COLD mark. If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. 5-20 NOTICE: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the COLD mark add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and a proper antifreeze at the coolant surgetank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap,is cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.) 5-21 r i I NOTICE: I In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater coreand other parts.So use the recommended coolant. I I 5-22 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 5-23 3. Open the air bleed valve located on the thermostat housing. I 4. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mix, up to the COLD mark. While filling the surge tank, watchto see if coolant begins to stream out the air bleed valve. When coolant beginsto stream out, close the valve. 5 . With the air bleed valve closed and the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s). 5-24 6. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the COLD mark. 7. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most every day driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistakenas the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch partially disengages. You may also hear this fan noise when you start theengine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages. If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. 5-25 A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,acts much like a skid and may require thesame correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, thenext section shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flattire safely. Changing a FlatTire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, Turn on your hazardwarning flashers. 5-26 Flat Tire The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire. L Blocked Tire The equipmentyou’ll need is behind the passenger’s seat. Your spare tire is stowed under the truck or mounted to the inside of the truck bed on the driver’s side. Jacking Tool Storage- Two and Four Door Models 1. Nut 2. Jack 3. Jack Handle Extension 4. Socket 5. Jack and Tool Storage Box 6. Ratchet 7. Jack Handle 8. Tool Retainer 5-27 Jacking Tool Storage- Extenc led Cab Models 1. Nut 2. Jack and Tool Cover 3. Jack Handle Extension 4. Tool Retainer 5. Jack and Tool Storage Box 6. Ratchet 7. Socket 8. Jack 9. Jack Handle Jacking Tool Storage- ChassisCab Mode .s 1. Nut 2. Jack Handle Extension 3. Socket 4. Jack and Tool Storage Box 5 . Ratchet 6. Jack Handle 7. Tool Retainer 8. Jack 5 -28 Jack Storage Your jack and wheel ratchet are behind the passenger seat. Turn the wing nut to the leftand remove the cover if there is one. Spare Tire Storage-Underbody Carrier Remember, never remove or restow a tire from or to a stowageposition under the vehiclewhile the vehicle is supported only by a jack. Spare Tire Your spare tire may be mounted underneath the rear of the vehicle, OR; it may be mounted to the inside of the truck bed on the driver's side. If you have a chassis cab,refer to the information fromthe body supplierhstaller. The sparetire is a fullsize tire, like the othertires on your vehicle. 5-29 To Remove the Spare Tire DOWN Marking UP Marking The ratchet has anUP and a DOWN marking. Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN marking facing you, to the wheel wrench. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper. Be surethe wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft. 5-30 I from under the vehicle. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the endof the cable andpull it through the wheel opening. Pickup Bed Mounting To remove a pickup bed mounted spare tire: 5-31 0 Turn the nut to the left until it comes off. 0 Pull the tire off the bolt and remove it from the bed. Changing the Tire Start with thejack, the jack handle and the ratchet . If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you'll need the jack handle extensions also. Attach the jack handle (and jack handle extensions, if needed) to the jack. With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you, rotate the ratchet to the right. 5-32 That will lift the jack head a little. Before raising the vehicle, do the following things. Put your spare tire near the flat tire. Remove the wheel trim. If there is a wheel cover, pry along the it’s edge until it comes off. Be careful; the rim edges may be sharp. Don’t try to remove it with your bare hands. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, use the wheel wrench and ratchet, with DOWN facing you, to unscrew and take them off. Then take the hub cap off. If the wheel has a trim ring, remove it by using the flat end of the wheel wrench. 5-33 If the wheelhas a smooth center piece or a centerpiece with recessed nuts, place the flat end of the wheel wrench inthe slot on the wheel and pry out gently. Using the wheel wrench and ratchet, with DOWN facing you, loosen allthe wheel nuts. Don’t.. Kernwe them yet. . Position the jack under the vehicle. 5-34 I NOTICE: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicleor may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sure tofit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle. Front Position Rear Position Raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchetto the right. Make sure the UP marking faces you. Use the jack handle extentions if the flat is on the rear of the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 5-35 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface. 5-36 Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by hand until the wheelis held against the hub. Rear Position Front Position Lower the vehicle by rotating theratchet to the left. Lower the jack completely. 5-37 Tighten Tightening Left the to Sequence Tighten the nuts firmly in a criss-crosssequence as shown. Rotate the ratchet to the right with theUP marking facing you. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” inthe Index. Put the wheel trim backon. For vehicles with plastic nut caps, tighten the c’aps until they are finger tight, then tighten them an additional one-half turn with the ratchet. Remove any wheel blocks. Remember, the jack and tire must be properly stored in their original storage position before you begin driving again. The next part, “Storing the Jack and Tire,” will show you how. 5-38 Storing the Tire and Jack Storing Tire and Jack -Underbody Carrier Mounted Spare Tir 8 7 1. Hoist Assembly 2. Ratchet 3. Wheel Wrench 4. Hoist Shaft 5. Valve Stem (Pointed Down) 6. Spare Tire 7. Retainer 8. Hoist Cable Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle, withthe valve stem pointed down. Pull the retainer through the wheel center. Attach the ratchet, withthe UP side facing you, to the socket. Put the flat end of the socket into the hole in the rear bumper. Turn the ratchet untilthe tire is raised against the underside of the vehicle. You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is secure, but pull on the tire to make sure. Return the jack,ratchet, socket and jack extensions to their location behind the passengers’ seat. Store the jack and jacking tools as shown in the 5-39 illustrations earlier in this section. Secure the items and replace the jack cover if there is one. Storing Tire and Jack -Pickup Bed Mounted Spare Tire 1. Spare Tire 2. Spare Wheel Mounting Nut 3. Spare Wheel Mounting Bolt Put the tire in the bed of the vehicle and slide the spare wheel mounting bolt through the bottom wheel nut hole. Be sure the valve stem faces out. Then place the spare wheel mounting nut on the bolt and turn it to the right until the tire is secure. Return the jack,ratchet, socket and jack extensionsto their location behind the passengers’ seat. Store the jack and jacking tools as shown in the illustrations earlier in this section. Secure the items and replace the jack cover if there is one. If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you dun 1want to do when your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, butyou must use caution. 5 -40 NOTICE: Spinning your wheelscan destroy partsof your vehicleas well as fast while shifting your back the tires.If you spin the wheels too and forth, you can destroy your . Rocking your vehicle to get it out: First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between “R” (Reverse) and a forward gear (or with a manual ,between First or Second gear and Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks, if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in theIndex. Using the Recovery Hooks I ?I A L If you ever get stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. 5-41 NOTICE: Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle be covered by warranty. could be damaged and it would not 5-42 I Service & Appearance Care Section Here you will find information aboutthe care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information. and then it showshow to check important fluid and lubricant levels . There is also technical information . about your vehicle. and a section devoted to its appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Fuel (Gasoline Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Diesel Fuel Requirements andFuel System ...................... 6-5 Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 HoodRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Cleaning Your Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6-17 Engine Oil (Except Diesel)................................ Engine Oil (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Automatic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 6-33 Manual Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 ............................................. 6-37 6-38 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 FrontAxle 6-1 Checking ThingsUnder the Hood (continued) Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45 Brake Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Other Maintenance Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Replacing Brake System Parts Windshield Wiper Blade Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50 Fluid Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Battery .................................. ........................................... Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6-62 Exhaust System 6-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Inflation-Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 When it’s Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Buying New Tires ...........!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-79 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80 Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84 Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Specifications Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Loading YourVehicle 6-2 Service Your GM dealer knowsyour vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer forall your service needs.You’ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do someof your own service work, you’ll want to get the proper GM Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service Publications”in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “MaintenanceRecord” in the Index. 6-3 NOTICE: If you try todo your own service work without knowing enough about it, your vehicle could be damaged. Maintenance Schedule Section 7of this manual, “Scheduled Maintenance Services”, explains the maintenance your new vehicle needs, and when it should be done. It also has a formthat you can use to record the maintenance work done on your vehicle. Be sure to read this information. Fuel (Gasoline Engine) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see“Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in this Section. For vehicles with gasoline engines,please read this. Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher. It should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the U.S. and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels should have the proper additives, so you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be sure you get the right kind of gasoline (unleaded).You’ll see “UNLEADED?’right on the pump. And only unleaded nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler neck. Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’s normal and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. What about gasolinewith blending materials that contain oxygen (oxygenates), such as MTBE or alcohol? MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.” Fuel that is no more than 15% MTBE isfine for your vehicle. Etlzanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel that is no more than 10% ethanol is fine foryour vehicle. Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol. NOTICE: Fuel that is more than5% methanol is bad for your vehicle. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. And even 5% at or less, there must be “cosolvents” and corrosion preventers in this fuel to help avoid these problems. Gaso/ines for Cleaner Air Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will help prevent deposits from formingin your engine and fuel system. That helpskeep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleanerair. Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General Motors recommends that you use gasolines with these blending materials, such as MTBE and ethanol. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide levels. In addition, some gasolinesuppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors recommends that you use reformulated gasoline. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the country that have high ozone levels. You should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain deposit control additives and oxygenates, and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions. Diesel Fuel Requirementsand Fuel System Some states and provinceshave restrictions on the purchase of diesel fuel for light-duty vehicles and require you to buy permits or pay special taxes. Some of these restrictions apply only to residents, and others apply to both residents and visitors. These restrictions can change. To learn the current restrictions in any state or province, contactyour auto club, the police or other officials. 6-5 Fuel Requirements NOTICE: Diesel fuelor fuel additives not recommended inthis manual could damage your fuel systemand engine. Your warranty wouldn’t coverthis damage. And: 0 Diesel fuelthat has been mixed with engine oil coulddamage your engine and emission controls. Always check with your service station operator to make sure his diesel fuelhas not been mixed withengine oil. 0 If you ever run out of diesel fuel,it can be difficultto restart your engine. “Running Out of Fuel,” later in this section, tells you how to get it startedagain. To avoid all this,try never to let your tank get empty. What Fuel to Use For best results, use number 2-D diesel fuel year-round (above and below freezing conditions) as oil companies blend number 2-D fuel to address climate differences. Number 1-D diesel fuel may be used in below freezing weather, however, it will produce a powerand fuel economy loss. The use of number l-D diesel fuel in warmor hot climates may result in stalling, poor starting when the engine is hot and may damage the fuel injection system. Diesel fuel may foam when you fill your tank. This can cause the automatic pump nozzle to shut off, even though your tank isn’t full. If this happens, just wait for the foaming to stop and then continue to fill your tank. I A CAUTION: Heat coming from the engine may cause the fuel toexpand and force the fuel out of your tank. If something ignites the fuel, a fire could start andpeople could beburned. To help avoid this, dl1 your fuel tank only until the automatic nozzle shuts off* Don’t try to ‘&topit off.” 6-6 Cold Weather Operation In cold weather (below 20”F, or-7”C), use 1-D or “Winterized” Number 2-D fuel (a blend of 1-D and 2-D). Be sure you get the right fuel. In very cold temperatures (when it stays below 0°F or -18”C), use Number 1-D. If you’re driving in very cold temperatures and can’t get Number 1-D or a “winterized” Number 2-D, you can use one gallon of kerosene for every two gallons of diesel fuel. Onceyou add the kerosene, run your engine for several minutes so the fuels will mix. Add kerosene only when the temperature falls below 0°F (-1 8”C), because the fuel economy of kerosene isn’t as good as that of diesel fuel. NOTICE: Never use home heatingoil or gasoline in your diesel engine. They can cause engine damage. In cold weather, your fuel filter may become clogged (waxed), especially if you use Number 2-D diesel fuel that hasn’t been “winterized.” To unclog it, warm the filter to between 32°F and 50°F (0°C to 10°C). You won’t need to replace it. Water in Fuel Sometimes, water can be pumped into your fuel tank along with your diesel fuel. This canhappen if a service station doesn’t regularly inspect and clean its fuel tanks, or if it gets contaminated fuel from its suppliers. If this happens, a “WATER IN FUEL’’ light will come on. If it does, the excess water must be drained. Your dealer can do this for you. This light also should come on briefly when you start your engine, as a check. If it doesn’t, have it fixed so it will be there to let you know if you ever do get water in your fuel. If the light comes on at any other time, use this chart. “Water in Fuel” Light Chart Problem Light comes on intermittently. Light stays on: 1. At temperatures above freezing. Recommended Action Drain water from fuel filter. Drain fuel filter immediately. If no water can be drained and lightstays on, see your dealer for assistance. 2. At temperatures below freezing. Drain fuel filter immediately. If no water can be drained - water may be frozen. Open the air bleed valve to check for fuel pressure. If no fuel pressure is present, replace the fuel filter. 3. Immediately after refueling large amount of water possibly pumped into fuel tank. Fuel tank purging required. See your dealer for assistance. Hesitation or “flat” performance at high speedor during hard acceleration may be an indication of premature fuelfilter plugging due to dirty or contaminated fuel. The filter element may need to be changed if this happens. See your dealer for assistance. NOTICE: If you drive when this warning light is on, you can damage your If the light comes on right fuel injection system and your engine. after you refuel, it means water was pumped into your fuel tank. Turn off your engine immediately. Then, have the water drained at once. To drain water: 1. Stop and park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn off theengine and apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the fuel tank cap. 3. Place a fuel-resistant container under the filter drain hose. With the engine off, open the water drain valve 2 to 3 turns. When standing in front of the vehicle, the valve is locatedon the right side of the thermostat housing. d 5. Start the engineand allow it to idle until clear fuel is observed. 6. Stop the engine and close the water drain valve. 7. Remove the fuel-resistant container and properly dispose of the contaminated fuel.To find out how to properly dispose of contaminated diesel fuel see“What to Do with Used Oil” in the “EngineOil (Diesel Engines)’’ part, later in this section. 8. Install the fuel tank cap. If the WATER IN FUEL light comes on again after driving ashort distance or the engineruns rough or stalls-a large amount of water has probably been pumped into thefuel tank. The fuel tank should be purged. 6-9 NOTICE: If there is water in your diesel fuel and the weather is warm or humid, fungus and bacteria can grow in the fuel. Theycan damage your fuel system. You’ll need a diesel fuel biocide to sterilize your fuel system. Yourdealer can advise you if youever need this. If your fuel tank needs to be purged to remove water, seeyour dealer or a qualified technician. Improper purging can damage your fuel system. Running Out of Fuel (Diesel Engines) If the engine stalls and you think that you’ve runout of fuel, do this: First, open the fuel filter air bleed valve. If there is air, then you are probably out of fuel. 0 : : To restart your engine: 1. If you’re parked on a level surface, add at least two gallons of fuel. However, if you’re parked on a slope, you may need to add upto five gallons of fuel. 2. With the air bleed valve open, turn your ignition keyto “Start” for 10 to 15 seconds to crank (but not start) your engine. Wait one minute between intervals of cranking to allow thestarter motor to cool. Overheating the starter could damage it. Keep doing this until you can just see some clear fuel at the air bleed valve. (If, during this step, the engine starts, turn the ignition off and close the valve before restart.) 6-10 3. Close the air bleed valve. 4. Turn the ignition key to “Start” for 10 to 15 seconds at a time until your engine starts. Fuel Filter Replacement (Diesel Engines) If you want to change the fuel filter yourself, here’s how to do it: Before you remove the filter, drain any water that may have collected in the fuel filter or filter head. See “Water in Fuel” earlier in this section to find out how to remove water from the fuel system. Then, drain fuel from the filter by opening the air bleed valve and the water drain valve. This prevents the fuel from spilling as you replace the filter. Drain the fuel intoa fuel-resistant container and dispose of it properly. I 1. Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake. 2. Take off the fuel tank cap. This releases vacuum in the tank. 3. The filter is located at the rear of the intake manifold. 6-11 I 4. Unscrew and remove the ring nut from the top of the filter head. 5 . Lift the element out of the filter head. 6. If there is any dirt on the element sealing surface of the filter head, clean it off. 7. Line up the writing on the top of the filter so it faces (is readable from) the front of the vehicle. Push the element in until the mating surfaces touch. 8. With the air bleed valve open, turn your ignition key to START for 10 to 15 seconds. Wait one minute for your starter to cool. Do this until you can see clear fuel coming from theair bleed valve. 6-12 9. Close the air bleed valve and replace the fuel cap. 10. Start your engine and let it idle for five minutes.Check your fuel filter and air bleed valve for leaks. Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the U.S. or Canada, unleaded fuel may be hard to find. Do not use leaded gasoline. If you use even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work well or at all. With continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can corrode, and your engine oil can deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor will be damaged.All of that means costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact major a oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the following address foradvice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation, North American Export Sales (NAES) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7 Filling Your Tank The fuel cap isbehind a hinged door on the left side of your vehicle. I A CAUTION: 6-13 While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel door. To take off the cap, turn it slowly tothe left. Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle’’ inthe Index. When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear a clicking noise. I NOTICE: If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right Your type.dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system might be damaged. ~~ 6-14 Checking Things Underthe Hood Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle. k Then go to the front of the vehicle andpull up on the secondary hood release, located just to the passenger side of the center of the grill. Lift the hood. Your vehicle, ifit has air conditioning, may have a auxiliary engine fan inaddition to the belt driven fan. 6- 15 Before closing thehood, be sure all filler capsare on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly. Cleaning Your Diesel Engine ____~~ - - - ___ ~~ NOTICE: If you spray or pour water or any other liquid on your engine when it is warm orhot, or when it is running, you could cause serious damage toit. If you everclean the engine, cleanit only when it is cold. Noise Control System The followinginformation relates to compliance with Federal noise emission standards forvehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kilograms). TheMaintenance Schedule booklet provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in your Warranty booklet. These standardsapply only to vehicles sold in the United States. 6-16 Tampering With Noise Control System Prohibited Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof 1. The removal or rendering inoperativeby any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement,of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or 2. The use of the vehicle after such device or elementof design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person. Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below. Insulation: Removal of noise shields or underhood insulation. Engine: Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if so equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. Fan and Drive: 0 Removal of fan clutch (if so equipped) or renderingclutch inoperative. Removal of fan shroud (if so equipped). Air Intake: Removal of air cleaner silencer. Reversing air cleaner cover. Exhaust: Removal of muffler and/or resonator. Removal of exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps. Engine Oil (ExceptDiesel) It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. 6-17 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower. When to Add Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll needto add some oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. NOTICE: Don’t addtoo much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. 6-18 The engine oil filler cap is located on the driver's side engine valve cover. Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you're through, What Kind of Oil to Use Beginning midyear 1993, oils of theproper quality for your vehicle will be identified with this new "starburst" symbol. The "starburst" symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API), and is preferred for use in your gasoline engine. You should look for this on the front of the oil container, and use only oils that display this new symbol. 6-19 You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the followingchart: LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS -GAS ENGINES RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. LOOK FOR ONE OF THESE LABELS HOT WEATHER SAE gw-30 COLD WEATHER IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30 GRADEOILSAREAVAILABLE,SAE 30 GRADE MAY RE USED AT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C). DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE low-30 if it’s going to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50. 6-20 HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS -GAS ENGINES RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. ~~ LOOK FOR ONE OF THESE LABELS HOT WEATHER - (OF +lo0 "C - - +38 +80 - - + 2 7 +60 - - + 1 6 +40 I --+4 +20---7 0---18 - SAE 1OW-30 PREFERRED SAE 5W-30 ~~ COLD WEATHER IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30 GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30 GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C). DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED As shown in the chart, SAE IOW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be colder than 60"F (16°C) before your next oil change. When it's very cold, you should use SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50. 6-21 If you cannot find oils with the new “starburst” symbol on the front of the container, you should look for and use oils containing the following three things: SHor SG “SH’ or “SG” must be on the oil container, either by itself or combined with other quality designations, such as “SHKD,” “SH,SG,CD,” “SG/CD,” etc. These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API) levels of quality. 0 SAE 5W-30 -Vehicles with Light Duty Emissions (8500 GVWR or less) OR SAE low-30 -Vehicles with Heavy Duty Emissions (8501 GVWR or more). Energy Conserving I1 Oils with these words on the container will help you save fuel. These three things are usually included in a doughnut shaped logo (symbol) on most containers. If you cannot find oils with the “starburst” symbol, you should look for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol, containing the three things noted above. NOTICE: If you use oils that do not have either the “starburst” symbol or an API SH or SG designation, you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the requirements for your vehicle. 6-22 Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil See if any one of these is true for you: 0 Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km). It’s below freezing outside and most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km). The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic). You tow a trailer often. Most trips are through dusty places. 0 The vehicle is frequently operated off-road. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you needto change your oil andfilter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes first. Light Duty Emissions: If none of them is true, change the oil every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months - whichever comes first. Change the filter at the first oil change and at every other oil change after that. Heavy Duty Emissions: If none of them is true, change the oil every 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 12 months - whichever comes first. Change the filter at the first oil change and at every other oil change after that if mileage determines when you change your oil. If time determines when you change your oil, change the filter each time you change your oil. Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) An engine coolant heater can be a big help if you have to park outside in very cold weather, 0°F (-1 8 “C) or colder. If your vehicle has this option, see “Engine Coolant Heater ” in the Index. 6-23 What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer?Don’t let usedoil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin andnails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing orrags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground,into sewers, orinto streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Engine Oil (Diesel Engines) It’s a good idea to check your engine oil level every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm andthe vehicle must be on level ground. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not showthe actual level. A J 6-24 To Check Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or a cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower. When to Add Oil If the oilis at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add some oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcasecapacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications” in the Index. I NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. 6-25 The engine oil filler cap is located on a filler tube at thefront of theengine. Just fillit enough to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way backin when you’re through. What Kind of Oil to Use Look for these two things: CF4SH CF-4/SH is the best oil for your vehicle. However,if you can not find CF-4/SH oil, you may use CF-4/SG or CE/SH or CE/SG oil. These may be listed as shownor in reverse order, for exampleSWCF-4. Other letters may also be listed, suchas SWCD, CE, CF-4, These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API) levels of quality. NOTICE: If you use oils that don’t have these designations, you can cause engine damage whichis not covered by your warranty. 6-26 DIESEL ENGINES RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS SELECT THE SAE GRADE OIL BASED ON THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE BEFORE NEXT OL I CHANGE HOT WEATHER 'F 'C + 100 + 38 + 60 - - +16 + 32 - - 0 I SAE 30 0 -20 -- -18 SAE 15W-40 PREFERRED - - -29 above 0°F (-1 8°C) SAE 1OW-30 COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED SAE 15W-40 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 15W-40is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going to be colder than 32°F (0°C) before your next oil change. When it's very cold, below 0°F (-18"C), you should use SAE 1OW-30 to improve cold starting. Also, SAE 30 may be used at temperatures abovefreezing, 32°F (OOC). These numberson the oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50. 6-27 This doughnut-shaped logo (symbol) is used on mostoil containers to help you select the correct oil. You should look for this on the oil container, and use only those oils that display the logo. GM Goodwrench@oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil See if any one of these is true for you: Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km). 0 It’s below freezing outsideand most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km). The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic). 0 You tow a trailer often. Most trips are through dusty places. The vehicle is frequently operated off-road. If any of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 2,500 miles (4 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes first. If none of them is true, change the oil and filterevery 5,000 miles (8 000 km) or 12 months -whichever comes first. What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let usedoil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly throw awayclothing orrags containing used engine oil. (Seethe manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or alocal recycling center for help. 6-28 Air Cleaner Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace theair filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. NOTICE: If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can causea damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. 6-29 To remove the air cleaner filter on a gas engine or a 6.5 liter naturally aspirated diesel, turn the wing nuts to the left. Remove the cover and change the filter. To remove the air cleaner filter on a 6.5 liter turbocharged diesel,first remove the rubber elbow. Remember to observe the caution about turbocharger blades on the rubber elbow. Then, unhook the cover retaining clips and pushthe rear of the cover toward the engine. Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to change your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index. How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done at a GM dealership Service Department. If you do ityourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. 6-30 NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: 0 When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). At high speed for quitea while. In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. To get theright reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). To check transmissionfluid hot: Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperaturesare above 50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (lO”C), drive the vehicle in “D” (3rd Gear) until the engine temperature gagemoves and then remains steady for ten minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. To check transmissionfluid cold: A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during acold check, you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate readingof the fluid level. To check the fluid bot or cold Park your vehicle on a level place. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in “ P ’ (Park). With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in “P” (Park). 0 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. 6-31 Then, without shutting ofSthe engine, follow these steps: 1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. v 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. 6-32 How to Add FIuid Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level up to the COLD area fora cold check orthe HOT area fora hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a pint. Don’t overfill.We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXR0N’-I11 or DEXRON@-IIE, because fluidswith that label are made especially for your automatic transmission. Damage causedby fluid other than DEXRON@-I11or DEXR0N’-IIE is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” 0 When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way;then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place. Manual Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engineoil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing. How to Check Because this operation can be a littledifficult, you may choose to have this done at a GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine partsor exhaust system, startinga fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Check thefluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmissionis cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. 6-33 Then, follow these steps: 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. How to Add Fluid Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch in your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (114 inch to 1/2 inch) in the pedal is normal. 6-34 When to Checkand What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. How to check The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. Hydraulic Clutch Grease Fitting If you have a five speed manual transmission with deep low (RPO MT8), a grease fitting is located on the clutch housing for lubricating the clutch fork ball stud. See your Maintenance Schedule forwhen to lubricate the clutch housing. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Be surenot to over-fill because you could damage your clutch. Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 6-35 How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricantto use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Four- Wheel Drive Most lubricant checks in this section also applyto four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-36 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. If the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole. 6-37 What to use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Engine Coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. The proper coolant for your vehicle will: Give freezing protection down to -20 “F (-29”C), or -34°F (-37 “C) in Canada and for vehicles with the cold climate option. 0 Give boiling protection up to 258 “F (125 “C). Protect against rust and corrosion. Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half antifreeze that meets “GM Specification 6038-M,” which won’t damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to “GM Specification 6038-M” with a complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. 6-38 I NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and otherparts. Some conditions, such as air trapped in the cooling system, can affect the coolant level in the radiator.Check the coolant level when the engine is cold and follow the steps under “Adding Coolant” for the proper way to add coolant. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Adding Coolant-Gas Engines The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger side at the rear corner of the engine compartment. To Check Coolant When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to HOT, or a little higher. 6-39 To Add Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the coolant recovery tank. Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. Adding Coolant -Diesel Engines The coolant surge tank is located on the passenger side at the rear comer of the engine compartment. . .. 6-40 To Check Coolant When your engine iscold, the coolant level should be at the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be above the COLD mark. If this light comes on, it means you’re low on engine coolant. To Add Coolanf If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool. Open the air bleed valve on the thermostat housing to allow trapped air out of the system. Close the bleed valve when coolant begins to flow out. 6-41 Radiator Pressure Cap-Gas Engines The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. U NOTICE: Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible on the cap engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows line upwith the overflow tubeon the radiator filler neck. Surge Tank Pressure Cap- Diesel Engines The surge tank pressure cap must be tightly installed with the arrows on thecap lined up with the top tube of the coolant surge tank. 6-42 NOTICE: Your surge tank pressure capis a unique 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap foruse with surge tankcooling systems only. It must be tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating.Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the top tube of the coolant surge tank. Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended. Power Steering Fluid NOTICE: Always turn theengine off before checking or adding power steering fluid. The power steering pump cap is close to the fan and other moving parts. How To Check Power Steering FIuid Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completelv tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. 6-43 .., When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the FULL mark. . When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be at the FULL COLD mark. What to Add Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. I NOTICE: When adding power steering fluid or making a complete fluid change, always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Hydro-Boost Brake System (Hydraulic Pump) The power steering pump is also used as the Hyrdo-boost pump. Refer to “Power Steering System”in this section when checking fluid level or adding fluid. 6-44 Windshield Washer Fluid To Add Open the cap labeled “WASHER FLUID ONLY.” Add washer fluid until the bottle is full. 0 When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which coulddamage the tankif it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer.It can damage your washer systemand paint. 6-45 Brakes Brake Master Cylinder Your brake master cylinder is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in your master cylinder might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes downto an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluidis leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-46 To Check BrakeFluid You can check the brake fluidwithout taking off the cap. Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid levels should be above “MIN.” If they aren’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure thelevels are above “MIN’ and below the top of each window. What to Add When you doneed brake fluid,use only DOT-3 brake fluid - such as Delco Supreme 1l @(GM Part No.1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly, and always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap before removing it. NOTICE: 0 Don’t let someoneput inthe wrong kind of fluid. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, inyour brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Brake fluid can damage paint, so be careful not to spill brake fluid onyour vehicle. If you do, washit off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. 6-47 Brake Wear Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. If you have a C 3500 HD model, it has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brakerepair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. Brake Pedal Travel See yourdealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. I Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakesadjust for wear. If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicleis to have really good braking. Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When you replace parts of your braking system- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in - be sure you get new genuine GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change, forthe worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Other Maintenance /terns Front Suspension and Steering Linkage Your maintenance schedulewill tell you how often to lubricate the fittings. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Front Wheel Bearings Your vehicle has front wheel bearings that must be cleaned and repacked. Your maintenance schedulewill tell you how often this must be done. Front Shock Absorbers The frontshock absorbers of your vehicle domany things. They help the vehicle ride smoothly and also control thetravel of the suspension system. When the shock absorbers areserviced, any replacement shock absorbers must be the same asthe original equipment shock absorbers in both extended lengthand strength. I NOTICE: If you use shock absorbers that are not the same as the original shock absorbers, the shock absorbers or suspension system could be damaged. 6-49 Wheel Nut Torque For vehicle with dual wheels, when the vehicle, wheel or fasteners are new, have the torque set at the first 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1600 and 9600 km). Use the torque specified in the appropriate Specification Chart later in this section. Single Belt Accessory Drive If your new vehicle uses a serpentine belt, it is lighter and more durable than systems with several belts. The belt runs over or around the pulleys on the engine. A tensioner may be used to keep the belt tight at all times. The tensioner also makes replacing the belt easier. If you need toreplace the belt, be sure to get the correct replacement belt. Your dealership or parts supplier can help you with this. The Accessory Drive belt Routing label on your vehicle will show you how to route the belt your vehicle uses. Windshield Wiper Blade Inserts To replace the windshield wiper blade insert, lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is facing away from the windshield. Unlatch the end of the insert from the holding clips. Remove the insert and slide a new one in place. Make sure the blade is secured in the clips. Air Conditioning Every now and then have your dealership check your air conditioning system to be sure it has not lost any cooling ability. If you think the system is not working properly, have your dealership check it out as soon as possible. The air conditioning will not work whenthe temperature is below 40°F (4°C). 6-50 Fluid Leak Check After the vehicle has been parked for a while, inspect the surface under the vehicle for water, oil, fuel or otherfluids. Water dripping from the air conditioning system after it has been used is normal. If you notice fuel leaks or fumes,the causes should be found and corrected at once. Lubrication Accelerator Control System Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often the accelerator linkage pivot points must be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Accelerator cables and cruise control cables should not be lubricated. Any cables that are worn or are hard to pull should be replaced. Hood Latches and Hood Hinge Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often to lubricate the hood latch and hood hinge assembly. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Propeller Shaft Slip Splines See your maintenance schedule to find out how often the slip splines must be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Constant Velocity Joints See your maintenance schedule to find out how often the constant velocity joints must be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper lubricant to use. Body Normal use of your vehicle will cause metal to metal wear at some points on the cab and body if they are not lubricated. For exposed surfaces, such as door checks, door lock bolts, lock striker plates, dovetail bumper wedges, etc., a thin film of engine oil should be applied. The seat adjusters and seat track should be lubricated with chassis grease. Door weather strips and rubber hood bumpers should be wiped clean with a rubber lubricant. 6-53 Never use too much of any lubricant and be sure to wipe up anyextra lubricant when you are finished. Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often to lubricant these items. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for theproper lubricant to use. Lock Cylinders To be sureyour locks operateproperly, they must belubricated. Your vehicle’s maintenance schedulewill tell you how often to lubricate them. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in theIndex for theproper lubricant to use. You should not use penetrating oils because they could wash out the factory installed lubricant and cause the lockto bind. De-icers which contain alcohol could also wash away the lubricant, so be sure to lubricate the lock after using a de-icer of this type. Tailgate Handle The tailgate handle pivot points on your vehicle should be lubricated to keep the handleworking smoothly. Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often to lubricant the handle. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for theproper lubricant to use. Battery Every new GM vehicle has a Delco Freedom@ battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, werecommend a Delco Freedom’ battery. Get one that has the catalog number shown on the original battery’s label. Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. 6-52 Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Bulb Replacement Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lights are off and the engine isn’t running. Sealed Beam Headlights 1. Remove the four screws from the headlight retainer. 2. Pull the headlight out and remove the retainer. 3. Unplug and remove the headlight. 4. Plug in the new headlight and put it in place. 5. Install the retainer to the headlight and tighten the screws. 6-53 Halogen Bulbs NOTICE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting it come in contact with on the bulb can anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on. If either comes in cause the bulbto explode when it turned is contact with the bulb, clean with it alcohol or a suitable degreaser andwipe the bulbdry. Composite Headlights 1. Remove the two screws at thetop of the radiator support. 2. Pull the headlight lens assembly out. 3. Unplug the electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb to the left and remove it. t 5. Put the new bulb in the lens assembly and turn it to the right until it is tight. 6. Plug in the electrical connector. 7. Put the headlight lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the two screws. Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights with Sealed Beam Headlights 1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the parkingkurn signal light assembly. 2. Remove the light assembly by swinging it out from the inside edge and sliding it out at the outside edge. 3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the light socket while turning the socket to the left. 4. Pull the socket out of the light assembly. 5. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it to the left and remove it from the socket . 6. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight. 7. Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it to the right until it locks. 8. Put the parkinghurn signal light assembly back into the vehicle and tighten the screws. 6-55 Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights with Composite Headlights 1. Remove the screws and take out the parkinghm signal light assembly. 2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the light socket while turning the socket to the left. 3. Pull the socket out of the light assembly. 4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it to the left and remove it from the socket. 5. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to the right until it istight. 6. Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it socket to the right until it locks. 7. Put the parking/turn signal light assembly back into the vehicle and tighten the screws. 6-56 Side Marker Lights with Sealed Beam and Composite Headights 1. Remove the screws and pull out the parking/turn signal light assembly. 2. Reach through the opening and turn the side marker bulb socket to the left and remove it . 5 . Put the socket back into the side marker assembly and turn it to the right to tighten it. 6. Replace the parking/turn signal light assembly and tighten the screws. 6-57 Fender Marker LightsDual Rear Wheel Pickup Models 1 1 A 1. Remove the screws and take the fender marker assembly out of the fender. 2. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove it from the lens assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight. 5 . Put the socket back into the lens assembly and turnit to the right to tighten it. 6. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 6-58 Tailgate Marker Lights 1. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the lensbulb assembly from the lens holder. 2. Unplug the lensbulb assembly at the connector wire. 3. Plug in a new lenshulb assembly and push the connector wire into the hole in the tailgate. 4. Snap the lensbulb assembly into the lens holder. Roof Marker Lights 1. Remove the screws and lift off the lens. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it istight. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 6-59 Cargo LighUCenter High Mount Stoplamp (CHMSL) 3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it istight. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. - Pickup Models Rear Lights 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the two rear light assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the light assembly. 6-60 3. Remove the screws from the bulb retainer and take it off the light assembly. 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket. 5. Put in a new bulb and push it in until it istight. 6. Replace the bulb retainer. 7. Replace the rear light assembly and tighten the screws. 8. Close the tailgate. Rear Lights- Chassis Cab Models I P 6-61 3. Slide the socket out of the light assembly. e .. .... I 4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it to the left and remove it from the socket . 5. Put in a new bulb and, pushing in gently, turn it to the right until it is tight. .. 6. Put the socket back in the light assembly and replace thelens and lens seal. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index for more information. Headlights The headlight wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the light switch. An electrical overload will cause the lights to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlight wiring checked right away. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow,etc., may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If the overload is causedby some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes. This protects the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed . 6-62 Trailer Wiring Harness The optional seven-wire trailer wiring harness is protected by an in-line fuse in the battery feed wire. This fuse isnear the junction block. See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index for more information. Fuse Block The fuseblock is behind an access door at the bottom of the instrument panel, next to the parking brake release lever. I I You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor, if you have one. To remove fusesif you don’t have one, hold the end of thefuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. Be sure to use the correct fuse. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse,you can “borrow” one of the correct value. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without-like the radio or cigarette lighter-and use its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as you can. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index for more information. 6-63 Exhaust System To help prevent damage to your exhaust system, donot continue to drive your vehicle if you notice: 0 Engine misfiring Loss of performance Other unusual operating conditions Have your engine and exhaust system serviced regularly. Three-way Catalytic Converter (gas engines) Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter is designed to reduce the pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use only unleaded fuel in your vehicle. If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your three-way catalytic converter and other enginecomponents. Three- Way Catalytic Converter (diesel engines) Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter is designed to reduce the particulates in your vehicle’s exhaust. If your vehicles three-way catalytic converter everneeds to be replaced, it must bereplaced with a three-way catalytic converter intended for use with diesel engines only. Engine Control Module System (All TBI equipped vehicles and diesel engine vehicles below8,500 Ibs. GVWR) Gasoline Engines This systemhas an oxygen sensor (02) that helps keep your engine’s air-fuel mixture at a proper level. Use onlyunleaded fuel in your vehicle. If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your oxygen sensor (02 ) and three-way catalytic converter. Diesel Vehicles Below 8,500 LBS. GVWR This system monitors engine speed and throttle position. It adjusts exhaust gas recirculation to limit emissions. 6-64 Malfunction Indicator (SERVICE ENGINESOON) Lamp The Malfunction Indicator(SERVICE ENGINESOON) Lamp on your instrument panel lets you know when your emission system needs service. The light will come on briefly when you start your engine to let you know that the systemis working. If it doesnot come on when you start your engine, orif it comes on and stays on while you’re driving, your system may need service. Your vehicle should still be driveable, but you should have your system serviced right away. Secondary Air Injection Reaction (AIR) System You may have this system. It has a control valve that willdirect air to where it is needed.If the AIR system needsservice, your Malfunction Indicator (SERVICE ENGINESOON) Lamp on your instrument panel will comeon. Loading Your Vehicle MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP a LWKG L -. .- -. OF1 TAN-S IN EFFECT . J W N ABOVE 1 -1 SIZE The CertificationEire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document in the cab. 1SPEED RTG RIM PSVKPA COLD) u u SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating). TheGVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The CertificationEire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front andrear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equallyon both sides of the centerline. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have aheavy load, you should spread it out. 6-65 Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. I NOTICE: Your warranty does not cover partsor components that fail because of overloading. If you put things inside your vehicle-like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else-they go asfast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. 6-66 Trailering Package If your vehicle comes with the Trailering Package, there is also a load rating which includes the weight of the vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating is called the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR). When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the weight of everything you put in it. And, remember to figure the weight of the people inside as part of your load. Your dealer can help you determine your GCWR. 6-67 Add-on Equipment When you carry removable items, like snow plow blades, you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy andinstall the new equipment. NOTICE: Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. Truck-Camper Loading lnformation Open your glove box door and look for this label: This label will tell you how much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how to spread out your load the right way. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus 0 everything else added to the camper after it left the factory; 0 everything in the camper; and 0 all: the people inside. The CargoWeight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside. But, you can figure about 150 pounds for each seat. The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR. 6-68 TRUCK LOADING INFORMATION 1. Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating (Pickup Truck). Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in glove box for “A”and “B” dimensions. Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes. EXAMPLE OF PROPER TRUCK AND CAMPER MATCH 1. Camper center of gravity Recommended center of gravity location zone. The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone for your vehicle’s cargo load. You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extraweight may shorten the center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. If your slide-in camper and its load weigh less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone foryour vehicle may be larger. Your dealer canhelp you make a good vehicle-camper match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR. 6-69 After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper,drive to a weigh station and weigh on the front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles. The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more than either of the GAWRs.The total of the axle loads should not bemore than the GVWR. Open your driver’s door and look at theCertificationmire label to find out your CWAR and GVWR. If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take out some things until all the weights fall below the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper. When you install and load your slide-in camper,check the manufacturer’s instructions. If you want more information on curb weights, cargo weights, cargo weight rating and the correct center of gravity zone foryour vehicle, your dealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.” Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer hitch attached,so that you won’t go over the GVWR or the GAWR. You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way, and if youchoose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. For more information, see “Trailer Towing” inthe Index. Pickup Conversion To Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed. Before you do so, first contact the GM Zone Office for your area for information on such conversions. (See the “Warranty andOwner Assistance” booklet for ZoneOffice.) Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapt the pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by a body builder in accordance with the information available from the Zone Office. 6-70 Tires We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. These tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and their warranties are delivered with every new vehicle. If your spare tire is a different brand than your roadtires, you will have a tire warranty folder from each of these manufacturers. Inflation - Tire Pressure The CertificatiodTirelabel which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires, when they’re cold. “Cold’’ means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than a mile. You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads. On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures for a typical reduced load are printed on the “Improved Ride Tire Pressure’’ label located on the driver’s door. Weigh the vehicleto 6-71 find the load on each tire and see thelabel for the minimum cold inflation pressures forthat load. NOTICE: Don’t letanyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enoughair (underinflation) you can get: Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading 0 Bad wear 0 Bad handling Bad fuel economy. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get: 0 Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride 0 ‘Needlessdamage from road hazards. When to Check Check your tires once amonth or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking at the tires will not tell youthe pressure, especially if you have radial tires - which may look properly inflated even if they’re underinflated. If your tires have valve caps, be sure to put them back on. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. 6-72 Special Tire Inflation If you have 16 inch tires on your vehicle, and: - You’ll be driving forvery long at speeds of 66 mph (105 km/h) to 75 mph (120 km/h) where legal, inflate tires to 10 psi (70 kPa) more than the recommended cold inflation pressures. - You’ll be driving forvery long at speeds of 76 mph (120 km/h) to 85 mph (135 km/h) where legal, cold inflation pressures should be increased by 10 psi (70 kPa) and you must also reduce axle load capacity by 10%. Do not drive over85 mph (135 km/h) even if it’s legal. Inflation pressures should never exceed 10psi (70 Wa) above the inflation specified for themaximum load of the tire. If you have 19.5 inch radial tireson your vehicle, and: - You’ll be driving for very long at speedsof 66 mph (105 km/h) to 70 mph (1 10 km/h) where legal, inflatetires to 5 psi (35 kPa) more than the recommended cold inflation pressures, and reduce the axle load capacityby 4%. - You’ll be driving forvery long at speeds of 7 1 mph (115 km/h) to 75 mph (120 km/h) where legal, cold inflation pressures should be increased by 5 psi (35 kPa)and you must also reduce axleload capacity by 12%. Do not drive over75 mph (120 kmh) even if it’s legal. Inflation pressures should never exceed20 psi (140 P a ) above the inflation specified for themaximum load of the tire. Tire Inspection and Rotation To make your tires lastlonger, have them inspected and rotated at the mileages recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index. Use this rotation FRT FRT pattern. D I ) 6-73 If your vehicle has front tires with different load ratings or tread designs (such as all season vs. o d o f froad) than the rear tires, don’t rotate your tires front to rear. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the CertificatiodTire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” inthe Index. When It’s Time for New Tires TREAD WEAR INDICATORS One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. You need a new tire if You can seethe indicators at three or more places around the tire. 0 You can seecord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread orsidewall is cracked, cut orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. 0 The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that can’t be repairedwell because of the size or location of the damaee. 6-74 Dual Tire Rotation Use one of these patterns if you have the same tire sizes and load rangeson the front and rear. Use this pattern if your front and rear tires are different sizes or loadranges. The dual rear tires are rotated as a pair and the insiderear tires become the outside rear tires. II 111 When you install dual wheels, be sure thevent holes in the wheels are lined UP. 6-75 Dual Tire Operation If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, the outertire will usually wear faster than the inner tire,Your tires will wear moreevenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically. If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding 5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires. Be sure to return to the recommended pressures when no longer driving under those conditions. Buying New Tires To find outwhat kind andsize of tires you need, look at the Certificatioflire label. / The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling,speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by a “MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. 6-76 Uniform Tire QuaUty Grading The following informationrelates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditionson a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction - A, 8, C The traction grades, from highestto lowest are: A, B, and C . They represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature - A, 8, C The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for atire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. These gradesare molded on the sidewalls of passenger cartires. 6-77 While thetires available as standard or optionalequipment on General Motors vehicles may vary with respect to these grades, all such tires meet General Motors performance standards and have been approved for use on General Motors vehicles. All passenger type (P Metric) tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longesttire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to bereset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your GM dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your GM model. 6-78 1 NOTICE: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains NOTICE: If your vehicle has dual wheels or LT265/75R16 sizetires, don’t use tire chains; they can damage your vehicle. If you don’t have dual wheels or if you have a tire size other thanLT265/75Rl6, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that arethe proper size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible withthe ends securely fastened.Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast with chains on willdamage your vehicle. 6-79 Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: 0 Gasoline 0 Paint Thinner 0 Benzene 0 Turpentine 0 Naphtha Lacquer Thinner Carbon Tetrachloride Nail Polish Remover 0 Acetone They can all be hazardous - some more than others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too. NOTICE: Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: 0 Laundry Soap 0 Bleach 0 Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, dampcloth. Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. Here are some cleaningtips: Always read the instructions on the cleanerlabel. Clean up stains as soon as you can -before they set. Use a cleancloth or sponge, and change to a clean areaoften. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately or it will set. Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 0 Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner followingthe directions on the container label. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material. Don’t rub it roughly. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 0 Rinse the sectionwith a clean, wet sponge. 0 Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat lamp. NOTICE: Be careful witha hair dryer or heat lamp. You could scorch the fabric. 0 Wipe with a clean cloth. 6-81 Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap. If you need to use a solvent: Gently scrapeexcess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with an air hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help prevent a cleaningring. (See the previous NOTICE.) Fabric Protection Your vehicle has upholstery and trim carpet that has been treated with Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a 3M product. Scotchgard protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, whichare the carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and trim carpet often to keep it looking new. TM TM Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167). Special Cleaning Problems Greasy or Oily Stains Such asgrease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum,cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt. 0 Carefully scrapeoff excess stain. 0 Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. 0 Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread. Non-Greasy Stains Such as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice,milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urineand blood. 0 Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 0 If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. 6-82 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Cornbination Stains Such as candy, ice cream, mayonnaise,chili sauce and unknown stains, Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow to dry. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner. Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth. Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. Things liketar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t getthem off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner. Cleaning Leather Use a softcloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddlesoap. For stubborn stains,use a mild solution of 10% isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol)and 90% water. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoepolish on leather. Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into finish, it can harm the leather. Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containingsilicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. 6-83 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. Glass Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner(GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decalson the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later.If abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license shouldnot be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade orwindshield. Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and replaced when worn. Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle The paintfinish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. 6-84 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or a 100%cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Your GM manufactured vehicle may have a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish. I NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paintfinish may dull the finishor leave swirl marks. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary. Use special care with aluminurq pim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. 6-85 Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped) Your aluminum wheels have a protective coatingsimilar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strongsoaps, chemicals, chrome polish, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax may be applied. NOTICE: If you have aluminum wheels, don’t use an automatic vehicle wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These brushes can takeoff the protective coating. White Sidewall Tires Your GM dealer has a GM White Sidewall Tire Cleaner. You can use a stiff brush with the cleaner. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During verycold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids & Lubricants’’ in the Index.) Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repairor replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Foreign Material Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, and other foreign matter can damage your vehicle’s finishif they remain on painted surfaces. Use cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. 6-86 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice andsnow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, accelerated corrosion(rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosionprotection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frameshould be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody vehicle washing system can dothis for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and smallirregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface. Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by General Motors. Bodies, body conversions orequipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered. Appearance Care Materials Chart PART NO. 1050172 SIZE PRODUCT Tar and Road Oil Remover 16 oz. (0.473L) 1050173 16 oz. (0.473L) ChromeCleaner and Polish 1050174 16 oz. (0.473L) 1050214 32 oz. (0.946L) WhiteSidewall Tire Cleaner Vinyl Leather Cleaner 1050244 16 oz. (0.473L) FabricCleaner 6-87 USAGE Removes old waxes, polishes, tar and road oil Removes rust and corrosion on chrome and stainless steel Cleans white and black tires Spot and stain removal on leather or vinyl Spot and stain removal on cloth and fabric PART NO. 1050427 SIZE 23 oz. (0.680L) 1050429 6 lbs. (2.72 kg) 1050729 8 oz. (0.237L) 1051055 16 oz. (0.473L) 1051398 8 oz. (0.237L) 1052870 16 oz. (0.473L) 1050201 16 oz. (0.473L) USAGE Glass cleaning and spot cleaning on vinyls Cleans vinyl and Multi-Purpose Powder Cleaner cloth on door trim, seats, and carpet-also tires and mats. Vinyl Top Cleaner Cleaning of vinyl tops Preservatone Vinyl top dressing Spot Lifter Spot and stain removal on cloth and fabric Exterior wash Wash-Wax (conc.) Exterior cleaner Magic Mirror Cleaner-Polish and polish PRODUCT Glass Cleaner Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) -I o I TESTVNXX3XXQ09696 0 I This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see itif you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications, and replacement parts. III cv I c3 I _ r T' I- m I 0 J n 6-89 Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. WHEELBASE 00000 LC3 MXl M 3 1 NA5 NB1 Q M X V K 3 VC2 K19K64 6BJ 62L 62U 6 7 06 7 16 7 9 V Y I Vy4 v 7 3 ‘419 ZJ7 7BJ 8HJ 9HJ i MODEL DESIGNATION OPTIONCONTENT I i PAINTTECHNOLOGY ORDER NUMBER EXTERIOR COLORS It’s very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this label is: your VTN, the model designation, 0 paint information, and a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removedfrom the vehicle. Add-on Electrical Equipment NOTICE: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. 6-90 Specification Charts Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subjectto change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it wasbuilt, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer. Engine Identification- Gas Engines Engine Type VIN Code Fuel System Produced By Emissions 4.3L V6 Z TBI? U.S. LD*/HD** 5.0L V8 H TBI? U.S., CAN. LD *Light Duty Emissions with 8500 GVWR and below or: **Heavy Duty Emissions with 8501 GVWR and above ?Throttle Body Injection Engine Identification- Gas Engines (cont.) Engine Type VIN Code Fuel System Produced By Emissions 5.7L V8 K 7.4L V8 N TBIT U S . , CAN. LD*IHD** TBIT U.S. LD*/HD** *Light Duty Emissions with 8500 GVWR and below or: **Heavy Duty Emissions with 850 1 GVWR and above ?Throttle Body Injection 6-91 Engine Identification- Diesel Engines Engine 6.5L Type VIN Code Fuel System Produced By Emissions V8 P Diesel U.S. LD 6.5L V8 S Turbo Diesel U.S. LD 6.5L va F Turbo Diesel U.S. HD Wheel Nut Torque MODEL C 1500 K 1500 & C-K 2500 C-K 2500 (w/CGP) C-K 3500-Single Rear Wheels C3500-Dual Rear Wheels C3500 HD-Front C3500 HD-Rear DESCRIPTION TORQUE 6 bolts (14mm) 120 ft. lbs. (160Nom) 120 ft. lbs. (160 Nom) 8 bolts (14mm) 8 bolts (14mm) 120 ft. lbs. (160 Nom) 120 ft. lbs. (160 Nom) 8 bolts (14mm) 5 bolts (5/8 in.) 10 bolts( 9 8 in.) 140 ft. lbs. (190 Nom) 175 ft. lbs. (240 Nom) 175 ft. lbs. (240 Nom) 5 bolts (14mm) Cooling System Capacity VIN QTY Without A/C* QTY With A/C* ENGINE Z 10.9Quarts(10.3Liters)10.9Quarts(10.3Liters) 4.3L H 17.5Quarts(16.5Liters)18Quarts(17Liters) 5.0L K 17.5 Quarts (16.5 Liters) 18 Quarts (17 Liters) 5.7L K 26.5Quarts(25Liters)27Quarts(25.5Liters) 5.7L w/3500 HD P 25 Quarts (23.5 Liters) 25 Quarts (23.5 Liters) 6.5L S 25 Quarts (23.5 Liters) 25 Quarts (23.5 Liters) 6.5L 6.5L F 26.5 Quarts (25 Liters) 26.5 Quarts (25 Liters) N 23 Quarts (22 Liters) 7.4L 25 Quarts (23.5 Liters) N 26.5 Quarts (25 Liters) 28.5 Quarts (27 Liters) 7.4L w/3500 HD After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Cooling System” in Section5. *All quantities are approximate. 6-92 Crankcase Capacity ENGINE 4.3L 5 .OL 5.7L* * 6.5L 6.5L 6.5L 7.4L** VIN Z H K QTYWithout Filter* 4 Quarts (3.8 Liters) 4 Quarts (3.8 Liters) 4 Quarts (3.8 Liters) - P-fST F? N 6 Quarts (5.7 Liters) QTY With Filter* 4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters) 5 Quarts (4.8 Liters) 5 Quarts (4.8 Liters) 7 Quarts (6.5 Liters) 7 Quarts (6.5 Liters) 7 Quarts (6.5 Liters) 7 Quarts (6.5 Liters) After refill,the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Oil And Filter Recommendations”in Section 5. *All quantities are approximate. **Add one additional quartfor C3500 HD Models. ?Oil filter should be changedat EVERY oil change. Fuel lank Capacity TYPE GasolineDiesel with Short Bed with Long Bed Crew Cab Standard Chassis-Cab Models Standard (Side Tank) Optional (Rear Tank) 3500 HD Models Standard (Side Tank) Optional (Rear Tank) QUANTITY 26 Gallons (98Liters) 34 Gallons(128 Liters) 34 Gallons (128 Liters) 23 Gallons (87 Liters) 3 1 Gallons ( 117 Liters) 23 Gallons (87 Liters) 3 1 Gallons ( 117 Liters) All quantities arefor a completely dry tank and are approximate. 6-93 Service Replacement Part and Filter Recommendations - Gas Engines Engine VIN Oil Filter Air Cleaner Filter PCV Valve Spark Plugs* Fuel Filter Radiator Cap 4.3L 5.0L z H PF52 A178CW. CV789C .CR43TS PF1218T A348C CV774C GF48 1 RC36 ?Four Wheel Drive Vehicle-use 5.7L K PF1218T A348C cv774c .CR43TS GF48 1 RC36 .CR43TS GF48 1 RC36 7.4L N PF1218 A348C cv774c .CR43TS GF48 1 RC36 a PF52 oilfilter *Use AC copper-cored resister type spark plugs Service Replacement Part and Filter Recommendations - Diesel Engines Engine VIN Oil Filter Air Cleaner Fuel Filter Surge Tank Cap 6SL P PF1218 A917C TP1006 RC33 6.5L S PF1218 A917C TP 1006 RC33 6.5L F* PF1218 A917C TP1006 RC33 *Heavy Duty Emission Engine Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask yourGM dealer. For additional information, see your “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” booklet. Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity TYPE Refrigerant R 134A QTY 2.25 lbs. (1.020 kg) 6-94 Fuse Mock I FUSE LEGEND HTR A X GAGES TURNlBU 4WD CTSY PCMllGN BRAKE PARK LP INJA grQ I WIPER €2 # -m ee15*II/ m PANEL LPS TRANS STOPMAZ 6-95 DRL CRANK II Fuses and Circuit Breakers NAME CIRCUITS PROTECTED FUSE Cruise Control,4 WD Display Illum. Rear Window Defogger Timer, Aux. Batt. Relay Feed, Safety Belt Buzzer Timer, Cluster Ign. Feed T~rn-B/u Back-up Lamps, Turn Signals EMC/Ign T.C.C., Air Diverter,E.S.C., E.G.R., E.C.M. Ign., R.W.A.L. Brake Switch 20 Amp Throttle Body Injectors 10 Amp 15 Amp 25 Amp 20 Amp Gages Ign. A Brake AC/Htr Ctsy R.W.A.L., Cluster-Speed0 H.V.A.C. 4WD, Aux. Batt. Relay Dome Lamp, Cargo Lamp, Ctsy, and Glove Box Lps. (TR-R), Radio (Memory-Clock) Horn Relay, Horn Feed, Cigar Lighter, Park Park LP Lamps C49 SW Illum., Headlamp “On” Warning, Radio Illum., H.V.A.C. Illum. Haz. P. Lps Flasher, Seat Belt Buzzer, Stop Stop/Haz. Lmps., R.W.A.L. Memory Windshield Wiper, Washer Wiper Radio Feed Radio AccAgn. Pwr. Windows AccBatt. Door Locks, Rear Window Defogger Crank Crank, Discreet Four WheelDrive 4WD DRL Daytime Running Lights CIRCUIT BREAKER 15 Amp 10 Amp 20 Amp 5 Amp 15 Amp 25 Amp 10 Amp 30 Amp 30 Amp 5 Amp 25 Amp 15 Amp *An inline fuseis used for the underhood lamp Do not use fuses ofhigher amperage than those recommended above. 6-96 Lamp and Bulb Data LAMP OR BULB HEADLAMPS 2 Headlamp System Halogen (Opt.) 4 Headlamp System (Composite) TRADE NO. POWER RATING AT 12.8V, WATTS 6052 5 5/65 2 H6054 6052 35/65 55/65 2 2 9005 65 2 LAMP ORBULB EXTERIOR Fog Lamp Front Marker Lamp Front Park and Turn Lamp Rear Parking Lamp Rear Stop and Turn Lamp Backup Lamp Backup Lamp Rear Park, Stop, and Turn Lamp* Fender Clearance Lamp Roof Marker Lamp Cargo LampICHMSL License Plate Lamp Underhood Lamp Reel Lamp TRADE NO. QTY H3 194 2357NA 3057 2 3057 3156 1156 1157 194 194 92 1 194 232 232 2 4 2 2 4 5 4 2 1 1 *Chassis Cab Only LAMP OR BULB INTERIOR Dome Lamps Reading Lamps Roof Console Lamps* Courtesy Lamp TRADE NO. 6-97 21 1-2 2 211-2 4 168 1003 2 2 Heater or A/C Control Lamp Four Wheel Drive Indicator Four Wheel Drive Shift Lever Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Ashtray Lamp Sunshade Vanity Mirror 194 161 194 194 194 74 *Crew Cab Only TRADE NO. LAMP OR BULB INSTRUMENT PANEL Transmission Indicator (PRNDL) Daytime Running Lights Indicator? Charging System Indicator Lamp Instrument Cluster Illumination -Gage Cluster Instrument Cluster Illumination -Tachometer Cluster Headlamp Beam Indicator Directional Signal Indicator Brake Warning Indicator Safety Belt Warning Check Gages Indicator Malfunction Indicator ("Service Engine Soon") Lamp Upshift Indicator Glow Plugs Lamp** Low Coolant Lamp** Water in Fuel Lamp** Service Throttle Soon Lamp** 161 74 74 194 194 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 **Diesel only ?Canadian Vehicles only 6-98 6 Scheduled Maintenance Services Section This section covers the maintenance required for your General Motors vehicle . Your vehicle needs these services to retain it’s safety. dependability. and emission control performance . A Word About Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Recording Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Selecting Your Vehicle’s Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Gasoline Engineswith Light Duty EmissionsMaintenanceScheduleI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 7-8 Maintenance Schedule I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline Engines with Heavy Duty Emissions MaintenanceScheduleI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 7-12 Maintenance Schedule I1 ............................... Diesel EnginesMaintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7-16 MaintenanceScheduleII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 7-22 Owner Checks and Services.................................. Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 MaintenanceRecord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 , . . . . . . . 7-28 Service Station Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements the new vehicle warrantiesSee yourGM dealer for details . . 7-1 A Word About Maintenance We at General Motorswant to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distancesonly a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks andreplacements than you will find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM dealer, the place many GM owners choose to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can berelied upon to use the proper parts and practices. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenancenot only helps keep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the removal of important componentscan significantly affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or even the wrong tire inflation can increase thelevel of emissions from yourvehicle. To help protect our environment, and to help keepyour vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. Recording Maintenance Services The Maintenance Recordnear the end of this section provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on yourvehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure towrite it down in the Maintenance Record. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle warranty repairs. 7-2 If you are skilled enough todo some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service informationGM publishes. For information on how to obtain various service publications for your vehicle,see “Service Publications” in the Index.You will find alist of publications and an order form in the backof the book. Scheduled Maintenance Services This part tells you the maintenance services that you should have done and the times you should schedule them. Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy withIf it. you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. These schedules arefor vehicles that: carry passengers and cargo withinthe recommended limits. You will find theselimits on your vehicle’s Certification Label.See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. are driven on regular road surfaces, and within legal driving limits, as described in Section 4 “Your Driving and the Road.” are driven off-road in the recommended manner.See “Off Road Driving WithYour Four-wheel Drive Vehicle” in the Index. 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Selecting the Proper Maintenance Services To find the proper maintenance schedule for your vehicle, you must know two things. What engine your vehicle has, and how you use your vehicle Your engine type will tell you which chart to use, and your driving conditions will tell you which schedule to use. The charts are found laterin this section. Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart Your engine type (Gasolineor Diesel) andits emissions classification (Light Duty or Heavy Duty Emissions) will tell you which maintenance chart to use. Find your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and look at the eighth character to see what your engine code is. Thenthe use following Engine Emissions Classifications tables to find your emissions classification. 0 Your VIN is on the plate on the top leftcorner of your instrument panel, the Certification Label and on the Service Parts Identification Label. See “Vehicle Identification Number”in the Index. If your engine has more thanone emissions classification, look at your Certification Label tosee what your Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. 7-3 Engine Emissions Classification- Gas Engines 5.0L V8 4.3L Engine V6 Z TBIT LD*/HD** Type VIN Fuel System Emissions H TBIT LD *Light Duty Emissions with8500 G V W R and below or: **Heavy Duty Emissionswith 8501 G V W R and above ?Throttle Body Injection Engine Emissions Classification- Gas Engines (cont.) Engine Type VIN Fuel System Emissions 57L V8 7.4L V8 K TBIT LD*lHD** N TBIT LD*/HD** *Light Duty Emissions with8506 G m and below or: **Heavy Duty Emissions with8501 G V W R and above ?Throttle Body Injection Engine Emissions Ciassification- Diesel Engines Engine Type VIN Fuel System Emissions 6.5L 6.5L V8 P Diesel LD V8 S Turbo Diesel LD 7-4 6SL V8 F Turbo Diesel HD Selecting the Proper Maintenance Schedule Here is how to tell which schedule to follow once you find the proper maintenance chart touse. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE I Is any one of these truefor your vehicle? Most trips are less than4 miles (6 kilometers.) Most trips are less than 10 miles(16 kilometers), and the outside temperatures are below freezing. The engine is at low speed mostof the time (as in door-to-door delivery, stop-and-go traffic, or commercial use). You operate in dusty areas or off-road frequently. You tow a trailer. If any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow Schedule I. Schedule I is shown by a plus sign (+) on the chart. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE I1 Follow Schedule I1 ONLY if none of the above conditions are true. Schedule I1 is shown by a dot ( 0 ) on the chart. 7-5 GASOLINE ENGINES WlTH LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS -MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE uf * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index $ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability priorto the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance servicesbe performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart”in this section. T0401/T0901 7-6 GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS -MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEpi- (continued) If your driving conditions doNOT meet those specifiedin “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section, use Maintenance ScheduleII (e). THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS. T0402R0902 7-7 GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE lft * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. $ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart” in this section. r0403~0903 7-8 GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULElh (continued) If your driving conditions doNOT meet those specified in “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section, use Maintenance ScheduleII (e). 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHARTUP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS. T0403alT0903a 7-9 GASOLINE ENGINES WITHHEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE yf - aintenance Services” * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. A A Noise Emission Control Service H Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart” in this section. ro404 -7- 10 ce ection,this GASOLINE ENGINES WITH HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE h (continued) I If your driving conditionsdo NOT meet those specified in “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in II W . I THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS. TO405 7-11 GASOLINE ENGINES WlTHHEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS MAlNTENANCE SCHEDULE ltf. - * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. A Noise Emission Control Service v Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart” in this section. A TO406 GASOLINE ENGINES WITH HEAVY DUTYEMISSIONS - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1I.t. (continued) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS. TO407 7 - 13 DIESEL ENGINES- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE T I 22 Exhaust Pressure Regulator Valve Inspection* ation** Wheel and23 Tire ve t 24 t t t t 25BrakeSystemsInspection** Change filter every15,000 miles (24 000 km), except when operatingin dusty conditions. Dusty conditions may require more frequent filter replacement. Extreme dust and dirt operating conditions (off-road), may require the air filter to be checked as often as every300 miles (483km) and replaced as necessary. * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section. A A Noise Emission Control Service Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the United States t This maintenance schedule applies to all diesel engines available. T0408/T0908 7-14 DIESEL ENGINES - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE@ (continued) If your driving conditionsdo NOT meet those specified in “Scheduled Maintenance Services”’ in this section, use Maintenance ScheduleII ( 0 ) . THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER 60,000 MILESAT THE SAME INTERVALS. T0409lT0909 7-15 DIESEL ENGINES- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI& * An Emission Control Service ** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section. A Noise Emission Control Service W Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. t This maintenance scheduled appliesto all diesel engines available. TO41On0910 A 7-14 - MAINTENANCE DIESEL ENGINES (continued) SCHEDULElit. If your driving conditions doNOT meet those specifiedin “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section, use Maintenance ScheduleII ( 0 ) . 25 I 30 THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS. TO41 1/T0911 7- 17 Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Services Below are explanationsof the services listed in the maintenance charts. The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in this section. Make sure whoever servicesyour vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drivesthe vehicle. - ALWAYS USE 1. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE* SH ENERGY CONSERVING I1 (GASOLINE ENGINE)OR CF-4/SH (DIESEL ENGINE) QUALITY OILSOF THE PROPER VISCOSITY. To determine the preferred viscosity oil for your vehicle’s engine (e.g. SAE 5W-30 or 1OW-30), see “Engine Oil” in the Index. 2. CHASSIS LUBRICATION-Lubricate the front suspension,king pin bushings, steering linkage, transmission, and transfer caseshift linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline center splines and front axlepropshaft splines, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs at the intervals specified. If you have a 3500 HD, lubricatethe king pins and king pin bushings, every 1,500 miles (2500 km)for Maintenance ScheduleI, or every 3,000 (5000 km) for Maintenance Schedule11. Ball joints and king pin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10” F (-12”C), or higher. When the weather is cold, let them warm up before lubrication or they could be damaged. Also, be sure to check all the vehicle fluid levels at this time. 3. CLUTCH FORK BALLSTUD LUBRICATION (5-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION WITH DEEP LOW ) -Lubricate the clutch forkball stud throughthe fitting on the clutch housing. Lubricant must be added “sparingly” to the fitting, as only .0066 lb. (.003 kg) is required to lubricatethe ball stud surface.Do not add lubricant moreoften than the intervals in the Maintenance Charts. Too much lubricant will damage the clutch assembly. -Drain, flush and refill system 4. COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE*?’ with new coolant. See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for the proper coolant and mixture to use in your vehicle. Also inspect the hoses and replace them if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Tighten all hose clamps (except constant tension clamps). Remove debrisand clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. Wash the radiator neck. To ensure proper operation, pressure test the radiator and cap. * An Emission Control Service ?A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected and repaired at once. 7-18 5. AIR CLEANER FILTER REPLACEMENT*- Replace at every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or more often under dusty conditions. Ask your dealerfor the proper replacement intervals for your driving conditions. 6. FRONT WHEEL BEARING REPACK (%WHEEL DRIVE ONLY) - Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings at each brake relining, or at the specified interval, whichever comes first. 7. TRANSMISSIONSERVICE? Automatic Transmission- Change the transmission fluid and filter every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) for vehicles under 8,600 GVWR or every 12,000 miles (20 000 km)for vehicles over8,600 GVWR if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic. Where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. Frequent trailer pulling. Uses such as taxi, police, delivery or other commercial service. If the vehicle is not used mainly under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) for vehicles under 8,600 GVWR or every24,000 miles (40 000km) for vehicles over 8,600 GVWR see “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index for more information. Manual Transmission-Transmission fluid does not require periodic changing. 8. CDRV SYSTEM INSPECTION* - Check the Crankcase Depression Regulator Valve System for any worn, plugged or collapsed hoses. Have the system checked as described in the Service Manual. 9. FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT*$ - Replace the fuel filter at the specified intervalor sooner if clogged. ?A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected and repaired at once. * An Emission Control Service the failure to $The California Air Resources Board has determined that perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. 7- 19 10. SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT*- Replace spark plugs with the type listed in Section6. See “Specification Charts” in the Index. 11. SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION-Clean wires and inspectfor burns, cracks or other damage. Check the wire boot fit at the distributor and at the spark plugs. Replace wires as needed. ?A fluid loss in these systems may indicatea problem. Have them inspected and repaired at once. 12, EGR SYSTEM INSPECTION*- Conduct EGR SYSTEM CHECK as described in the Service Manual. 13. ELECTRONIC VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE (EVRV) or INSPECTION* -Inspect filter for excessive contamination plugging. If required, clean element with a solution of biodegradable soap and water, let dryand reinstall element. 14. ENGINE TIMING CHECK AND DISTRIBUTOR CHECK (SOME MODELS)*$ - Adjust timing to underhood label specifications. Inspect the inside and outside of the distributor cap and rotor for cracks, carbon tracking and corrosion. Clean or replace as needed. 15. FUEL TANK, CAP AND LINES INSPECTION*$- Inspect the fuel tank, cap and linesfor damage or leaks. Remove fuel cap, inspect gasket for an even filler neck imprint,and any damage. Replace parts as needed. 16. THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED AIR CLEANER INSPECTION*A - (If so equipped.) Inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up. Be sure the valve works properly. 17. SINGLE ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE (SERPENTINE) BELT INSPECTION* - Inspect belt. Lookfor cracks, fraying, wear, and proper tension. Adjust or replace as needed. * An Emission Control Service ANoise Emission Control Service that the failureIO $The California Air Resources Board has determined perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. 7-20 - 18. EVAPORATIVE CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS) INSPECTION* Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hookup, routing, if equipped. and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, Replace as needed. 19. SHIELDS AND UNDERHOOD INSULATION for INSPECTIONAV - Inspect shields and underhood insulation damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. 20. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM INSPECTIONAV - Check the air intake system installation tosee that gaskets are sealed properly and all hose connections, fasteners, and other components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is properly seated, that the cover fits tightly, and the wing nuts are tight. Tighten connections and fasteners or replace damaged parts as required. 21. THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED ENGINE COOLING FAN INSPECTIONAV - (If so equipped.) Inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up. Be sure the valve works properly. 22. EXHAUST PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION* - Check that the valve works properly. Correctany binding. Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing or decay. Replace parts as needed. 23. TIRE AND WHEEL ROTATION ANDINSPECTION - For proper wear and maximum tirelife, rotate tires atthe first 6,000 miles (10 000 kilometers) for Schedule I (+) or 7,500 miles (12 500 kilometers) for Schedule I1 ( 0 ) and then every 15,000 miles(25 000 kilometers) thereafter. Follow the instructions and patterns shownin Section 6. Check tires for uneven wear or damage. If irregular or premature wear is apparent, checkwheel alignment. Also, check or damaged wheels. See “Tires” in the Index for more information. For dual wheels, whenever the vehicle, wheels,or fasteners are new, have the wheel fastener torque set at the first 100,1,000 and 6,000 miles ( 160,1600 and 10 000 km). Block the tires opposite those being removed to keep the vehicle from rolling. * An Emission Control Service ANoise Emission Control Service VApplicable only to vehicles soldin the United States 7-21 24. DRIVE AXLE SERVICE? - Check readfront axlefluid level and add as needed. Check constantvelocity joints andaxle seals for leaking. 0 Locking differential- Drain fluid at firstoil change andrefill. Check fluid level and add as needed at subsequentoil changes. In dusty areas, or trailer towing applications drain fluid at every 15,000 miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill. a Standard differential- Check fluidlevel and add as needed at every oil change. In dusty areas, or trailer towing applications, drain fluid every 15,000miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill. 0 More frequentlubrication may be required on heavy-duty or off-road use. 0 3500 HD Models - 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme overload/trailertow conditions and high speed conditions (above 45 mph (72 k d h ) ) for extended periods of time must change drive axlefluid every 3,000 miles (4828 kilometers) or 3 months, whichever comes first, OR must use 75W-140 synthetic fluid meeting GM specifications, See“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” at the end of this section for the proper fluid to use. 25. BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION?’- When the engine oil is changed, inspect the linesand hoses for properhookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Check theparking brake adjust, and the fluid level in the master cylinder. A low fluid level can indicateworn disc brake pads which may need to be serviced. When the wheels are removed for rotation, inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Alsoinspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brakeparts, including drums, wheel cylinders, parking brake, etc., at the same time. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel and mounting surfaces before mounting the wheel. Inspect brakes more oftenif driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. +A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected andrepaired at once. Owner Checks and Services Listed beloware owner checks and services which should be made at the time period specified to help ensure proper safety, emission performance, and dependabilityof your vehicle. Be sure any necessary repairsare completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, makesure they are the proper ones, as shown in this Section. At Least Oncea Month Tire inflation pressure check - Check the tires for proper inflation.If they are low, inflate them to the level specified on the Certificatioflire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” or “Inflation-Tire Pressure” in the Index. At Least Once a Year Key lock cylinder lubrication -Lubricate key lock cylinders with engine oil. See the “Recommended Fluid and Lubricants” chart in this section. Transmission neutral or clutch start switch operation - 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the manual parking brake andthe regular brake. See Do not use the accelerator “Brakes” and “Parking Brake” in the Index. pedal. 3. Be ready to turn off theengine immediately if it starts. 4. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral). The starter should work only in On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in “ N ’ (Neutral), push the clutch down halfway, andtry to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. Steering column lock operation -While parked, try to turn the key to LOCK in each gear shift position. With an automatic transmission,the key should turn toLOCK only when the gear shift is in“F’” (Park). 7-23 On vehicles with a key release lever, try to turn the key to LOCK without pressing the lever. The key should turn to LOCK only with the key lever depressed. On all vehicles, the key should come outonly in LOCK. Parking brake and transmission “ P ’ (PARK) mechanism operation- Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the manual parking brake. 0 To check the parking brake: With the engine running and the transmission in “ N ’ (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. To check the “P” (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Apply the regular brake and shift to “P” (Park). Release the manual parking brake, then slowly release the regular brake. Lap and Shoulder Belts Condition and Operation - Inspect belt system, including webbing, buckles, latchplates, retractors, guide loops and anchors. Have a belt assembly replaced if the webbing has been cut or otherwise damaged. Body Lubrication Service- Lubricate all body door hingeswith engine oil. Also lubricate the tailgate,tailgate handle pivot points, and tailgate mounted spare tire carrier (if equipped). Lubricatethe body hood, fuel door and rear compartmenthinges, latches and locks includinginterior glove box and console doors, and any folding seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Periodic Maintenance Inspections - Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance each spring or fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service centerdo these jobs, Makesure any necessary repairs are completed at once. 7-24 Steering and Suspension Inspection? - Inspect front and rear suspension and steering systemfor damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Lubricate the steering linkage. Accelerator Control System - On gasoline engines, lubricate the pivot at the TBI throttle lever stud with engineoil. Do not oil any accelerator or cruise control cables. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear. Exhaust System Inspection- Inspect the complete system including the three-way catalytic converter. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missingor out-of-position parts, as well as, open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat buildupin the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes seep into the passenger compartments. Drive Axle Service?- Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and axle sealsfor leaking. Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) Inspection?-Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, checkfront axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. Oilthe control lever pivot point and all exposed control linkage. Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on heavy-duty or off-road .use. ?A fluid lossin these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspecte and repairedat once. 7-25 Recommended Fluids & Lubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part numberor specification may be obtained from your GM Dealer. FLUIDLUBRICANT API service SH or SG Energy Conserving I1 oils of the recommended viscosity. The “SH” designation may be shown alone or in combination with others, such as “SWCD,” “SH,SG, CD,”“SG/CD,” etc.To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. C F 4 S H . The “ C F 4 S H ’ Engine Oil - Diesel Engines API service designation may be shown aloneor in combination with others, suchas “CF-4/SG,” “CE/SH’ or “CE/SG,” etc. The designationmay also be listed in reverse order, such as“SHKF-4.” To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,see “Engine Oil” in the Index. Mixture of water anda good quality Engine Coolant ethylene glycol base antifreeze conforming to “GM Specification 6038-M” (GM Part No. 1052753), or approved recycled coolant conforming to “GM Specification 6038-M’ witha complete coolant flush and refill. Hydraulic Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM PartNo. 12345347 or equivalent). Hydraulic Brake Systems Delco Supreme 11 brake fluid (GM Part No. 1052535 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). Parking Brake Cables Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part Power Steering System No. 1050017 or equivalent) conforming to “GM Specification 99850 10.” Automatic Transmission D E X R O N ~111or D E X R O N ~IIE Automatic Transmission Fluid. USAGE Engine Oil- Gasoline Engines @ 7-26 USAGE Manual Transmission: a. 5-Speed with Low Gear (RPO MT8) b. 5-Speed without Low Gear (RPO MG5) Differential: a. Standard (Saginaw) Front and Rear Axle b. Locking c. 3500 HD Models used under extreme conditions Transfer Case Gas Line Column Shift, Transfer Case, Shift Lever, and Propeller Shaft Clutch Fork Ball Stud (5-Speed with Low Gear) Hood Latch Assembly a. Pivots. mQ . . spring anchor . . b. Release Pawl Front Wheel Bearings F'LUIDLUBRICANT a. Castrol Syntorq or equivalent (GM Part No. 12345871 - 1 gal.) (GM Part No. 12346074- 1 st.). b. Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349 or equivalent). a. Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAE-80W-90 Gear Lubricant. b. Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. 1052271) orSAE-80W-90 Gear Lubricant. c. Axle LubricantSAE-75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant. D E X R O N ~111 or DEXRON@IIE Automatic Transmission Fluid. Gas Line De-Icer (GMPart No. 105 1516 or equivalent). Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12346003 or equivalent)or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Chassis Lubricant (GMPart No. 12346003 or equivalent)or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. a. Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109 or equivalent). Chassis Lubricant (GMPart No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade2, Category LB or GC-LB. Wheel Bearing Lubricant(GM Part No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category GC or GC-LB. 7-27 FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE Propeller Shaft SplineNniversal Joint Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. No. 1050109 or Automatic Transmission Shift Engine Oil (GM Part Linkage,FloorShiftLinkage,equivalent). Hood and Door Hinges, Body . DoorHingePins,Tailgate Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seat, Fuel Door Hinge Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109 or Key Lock Cylinders equivalent) ora synthetic light weight engine oil (SAE 5W-30). Chassis Lubrication Windshield Washer Solvent and Anti-Freeze Weatherstrip Squeaks Weatherstrip Conditioning Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Chassis Lubricant (GMPart No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade2, Category LB or GC-LB. GM Optikleen washer solvent (GM Part No. 1051515 or equivalent). Spray-A-Squeek (GM Part No. 1052277). Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345 120 or equivalent). 7-28 Maintenance Record After eachof the preceding Scheduled Maintenance Services is performed, record the date, odometer reading, services performed (list item numbers) and who performedthe services in the appropriate column. In addition, retain copies of your receipts. It is suggested that receipts be kept with your Owner’s Manual. TO001 7-29 Service Station Checks It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these under-hood checks at each fuel fill. Check the engine oil level and add if necessary. Check the engine coolant level in the recovery bottle and add if necessary. Check the windshield washer fluid level and add if necessary. See these itemsin the Indexfor information on how to check them. Fluid See Page 6-45. €5 engines, use 87 octane (or higher) unleaded gasoline only. For diesel engines, use at least1D diesel fuel.For fuel tank capacity See Page 6-88, / Cold Tire Pressure See the Certification/Tire label on the inside rear edge of the driver's door, See Page 6-65,6-71. 7-31 Notes 7-32 Customer Assistance Information Section Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to repor any safety defects. Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired (TDD) . . . . . 8-3 GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE - Alternative Dispute Resolution Program. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Reporting Safety Defects To The United States Government . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Reporting Safety Defects To The Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Reporting Safety Defects To General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 8-5 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Courtesy Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8-1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Chevrolet. Normally, any concern withthe sales transaction or the operationof your vehicle will be resolvedby your dealer’s Sales or Service Departments. of all concerned, Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE - Discuss your concern witha member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can often be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts Manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the General Manager. STEP TWO - If after contactinga member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center .by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, call 1-809-763-13 15. In all other overseas locations, contact GM North American Export Sales in Canadaby calling 1-905-644-41 12. For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: Your name, address, home and business telephone number 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plateat the left top of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage 0 Nature of concern We encourage you to call the toll free number listed previouslyin order to give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet, write to: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P. 0.Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of Canadian andGM overseas offices. 8-2 When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealership's facilities, equipment and personnel.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. Customer Assistancefor the Hearingor Speech Impaired(TDD) To assist customerswho have hearing difficulties, Chevrolet has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devicesfor the Deaf) equipment at its or speech impaired customer who Customer Assistance Center. Any hearing has access toa TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) can communicate with Chevroletby dialing: 1-800-TDD-CHEV (1-800-833-2438). (TDD users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.) GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program" T h i s program may not be available in all states, depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance informatio booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations in this program. and/or to discontinue its participation Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealerare committed to making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. Our experience has shown if a situation arises whereyou feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, that the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. There may be instances wherean impartial third-party can assist in arriving of at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assistin reseiving these disagreements Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle disputes between customers and automobile manufacturers. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently ownor lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 22203 8-3 To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name and address, your vehicle identification number (VIN), and a statement of the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. We prefer you utilize the customer satisfaction procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary between you and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customersmay present their case toan impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept orreject. If you accept the decision, GMwill be bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about forty days from thetime you file a claim until a decision is made. Some state lawsmay require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contactthe BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1 020. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 8-4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada, Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call usat 1-800-222-1020 , or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P. 0. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (French). Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 ColonelSam Drive Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7 8-5 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to provide the services of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Number Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV USA (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers.The following services are available: Towing 0 Locksmith Tire repair Rental car or taxi Additional services as necessary The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services. For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to give to the advisor: 0 Vehicle Identification Number 0 License plate number 0 Vehicle color Vehiclelocation 0 Telephone number where you can be reached Vehicle mileage 0 Description of problem Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance in Canada or theU.S.A. Please refer to program accessible from anywhere the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. 8-6 Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1994 ChevroletIGeo passenger carand light duty trucks. In Canada, please consult your GM Dealer for information on courtesy transportation. COURTESY TRANSPORTATION INCLUDES: One way SHUTTLE RIDE for anywarranty repair. Up to $30 maximum daily VEHICLE RENTAL allowance for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 days. Up to $30 maximum daily CAB, BUS, or OTHER transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 days. Up to $10 daily FUEL allowance forrides provided by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 days. Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealership service management. Claim amounts should reflect all actual costs. Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation Program is not part of the BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Courtesy TransportationProgram at any time without notification. For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geodealer. Service Publications Information on how to obtain Product Service Publications(PSP’s) and Indexes as describedbelow is applicable only in the fifty U S . states (and the District of Columbia) and only for carsand light trucks with GVWR less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletinsand Indexes can be obtained by writing to: General Motors of Canada Limited Service Publications Department 1908 Colonel Sam Dr. Oshawa, Ontario LI H 8P7 Chevrolet regularly sends its dealers useful service bulletins about Chevrolet products. Chevrolet monitors product performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for servicing ourproducts better. Now, you can get these bulletins too. 8-7 Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service your vehicle better. Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number of cars or trucks. Your Chevrolet dealer ora qualified technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin applies toyour vehicle. You can subscribe toall Chevrolet’s bulletins by calling Helm, Inc. at 1-800-7824356. This way you’ll get them as they become available. Individual PSP’s If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s issued by Chevrolet for all car or truck models in the model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, such as those which may pertain to a particular model. To do this, you will first need to see our index of PSP’s. It provides a variety of information. Here’s what you’ll find in the index and how you can get one: What You’ll Find in the Index: 0 A list of PSP’s published by Chevrolet in a model year (1990 or later). PSP’s covering all models of Chevrolet cars or light trucks (less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg) GVWR) are listed in the same index. 0 Ordering information so you can buy the specific PSP’s you may want. Price information for the PSP’s you may want to buy. How You Can Get an Index: Indexes are published periodically. Most of the PSP’s which could potentially apply to the most recent Chevrolet models will be listed in the most recent publication for that model year. This means you may want to wait until the end of the model year before ordering an index, if you are interested in buying PSP’s pertaining to a current model year car or truck. Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular model year vehicle may be published in later years, and these would be listed in the later year’s index. When you order an index for a model year that is not over yet, we’ll send you the most recently published issue. Check the ordering form for indexes for earlier model years. Cut out the ordering form, fill it out, and mail it in. We will then see to it that an index is mailed to you. Thereis no charge for indexes for the 1989- 1994 model years. 8-% Toll-Free Telephone Number If you want an additional ordering form foran index, just call toll-free and we’ll be happy to send you one. Automated recording equipment will take your name and mailing address. The number to call is 1-800-55 1-4123. Copies at Participating Dealers Copies of Indexes and individual PSP’s are atyour participating Chevrolet dealer. You can ask to see them. A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: These PSP’s are meant for technicians. They arenot meant for the “do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians have the equipment, tools, safety instructions, and know-how to do a job quickly and safely. Chevrolet reserves the right to change these procedureswithout notice. Chevrolet Service Publications You can get these Product Service Publicationsby using the order form. You can also get Service Manuals and Owner Publications. 8-9 n a HE i= ct) W n W W Index Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.5.0 3-7 Aircontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Refrigerant Change Detection ................................ 3-8 3.97,6.94 Refrigerant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Antenna.Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brakes (See “Brakes”) 6-80 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 AMRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer . . . . . . . . 3-16 Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3-20 Cassette Tape Player Care ....................................... 2-21 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle 6-37 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Front Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RearLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 6-52 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belts (See “Safety Belts”) 8-3 Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Brakes Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 7 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 2-28 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacingparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 2-70 System Warning Light ......................................... Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 InEmergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Break-In,NewVehicle Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Replacementchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 C Camper Wiring Harness ........................................... 2-83 Capacities/Specification Charts ..................................... 6-91 2-33 Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 CargoLamp .................................................... Cassette Tape Player (see “Audio Systems” ) 6-64 Catalytic Converter .............................................. Certification/Tire Label ........................................... 6-65 Changing a Flat Tire ......................................... 5-26. 5-32 Chemical Paint Spotting ........................................... 6-87 Child Restraints (See “Safety Belts”) CHMSLFeedWire .............................................. 2-82 Cigarette LightedAshtrays ......................................... 2-52 Circuit Breakers (See “Fuses”) Cleaning 6-85 Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass ....................................................... 6-84 6-81 InsideofVehicle .............................................. 6-83 Instrument Panel. Top .......................................... ............................................. Outside of Vehicle 6-84 Special Problems .............................................. 6-82 6-83 VinylorLeather .............................................. WheelsandTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Windshield .................................................. 6-84 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer ... 3-14. 3-18 Conversion to Chassis Cab ........................................ 6-70 Coolant (See “Engine”) Cooling System Capacity .......................................... 5-17 6-93 Crankcasecapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control .................................................. 2-44 2-48 Erase SpeedMemory .......................................... 2-46 Increasespeed ............................................... 2-48 OnHills ..................................................... 2-47 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Reducespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume ..................................................... 2-46 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 ToGetOutOf ................................................ 2-48 Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................................... 8-2 Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) ......................... 2.50.2.75 Indicator Light .......................................... 2.50. Diesel Fuel (See “Fuel”) DomeLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving AcrossanIncline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.75 2-51 2-7 2-5 4-21 4-22 Driving (continued) 4.24,4.38 AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 BackingUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 InBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 4-28 InCity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 In Sand, Mud, Ice, Or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 5,4-22, 5-40 InWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 4-25 Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4-43 OnGrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................... 4-31 On Hill and Mountain Roads 4-16 OnOff-RoadHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 5,4-33, 4-55 On Snow or Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 4-40, 5-40 Stuck in Deep Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15,4-23 Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4-33 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 WithaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Electronic Heating/Air Conditioning (See “Heating”) Engine Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14.5.17. Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19.3.4.6.23 Coolant (Block) Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Weather Starting (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 13.5.20.6.92.6.98 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61.65. Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96.93 2.36. 3.64 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (See “Oil”) Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Runningwhileparked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,16 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12. Equipment,Ad d.On ............................................. Exhaustsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36. 3.64 3 6-41 6-29 2-17 2-79 5-25 6-16 6-89 5-11 2-33 6-68 F FanNoise ...................................................... 5-25 6-94 Filter Replacement Chart .......................................... Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Fluid Automatic Transmission ........................................ 6-30 6-47 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Coolant ..................................................... Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92.6-93 FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 6-35 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47. 6-51 Manual Transmission .......................................... 6-33 6-43 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator ..................................................... 5-17 6-39 RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Fluids .......................................... 7-25 6-36 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Four-WheelDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. 6-36 FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Fuel (Diesel Engines) ............................................. 6-11 6-6 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 RunningOutOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Tankcapacity ................................................ 2-71 Water in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 Fuel (Gasoline Engines) ............................................ 6-13 Filling YourTank ............................................. Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Gasolines for Cleaner Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6-93 Tankcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64.6-96 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FuseBlock ............................................. 6-63.6-95 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62.6-97 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......................... 6-62 6-62 Trailer Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45. 6-96 WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Temperature Gage ...................................... FuelGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure Gage ............................................. Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 2-78 2-79 2-78 2-68 2-80 2-68 Gages (continued) Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HalogenBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49.6-53. Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-LowBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SealedBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating System (with A/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating System (without A/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FanKnob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FunctionLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TemperatureLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood CheckingUnder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulicclutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GreaseFitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 2-68 2-82 6-54 5-2 1-5 6.62 6-54 6-54 2-76 2-41 6-53 3-6 3-8 3-6 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-8 3-5 4-30 4-40 6-15 6-51 2-39 6-34 6-35 4-27 I If You’re Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow ........................... Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflation-Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 2-11 6-71 2-67 2-67 2-67 J Jackstorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29’5-39 5-3 Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K KeyReleaseLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2-12 2-3 L Labels 6-65 Certificatioflire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Truck-Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Bulb Replacement ................................... 2-52.6-53, 6-98 CargoLamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58,6-60 2-73 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CheckGagesLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 2-82 CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DomeLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 6-55 Front Parkingflurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GlowPlugsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Headlights (See “Headlights”) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74, 6-66 2-49 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 ServiceEngineSoon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 2-72 Service Throttle Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60,6-61 6-98 ReplacementChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RoofMarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Tailgate Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 UnderhoodReelLamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 WaterInFuel ................................................. 2-71 Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 6-51 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Accelerator ControlSystem ..................................... 6-51 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 6-37 FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Front Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Suspension and Steering Linkage ............................ 6-49 6-49 FrontWheelBearings ........................................... TailgateHandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Hood Latches and Hinge ........................................ 6-51 6-35 Hydraulic Clutch Grease Fitting .................................. Lockcylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Propeller Shaft Slip Splines ..................................... 6-51 RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 7-25 RecommendedLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 6 M Maintenance 649 OtherItems .................................................. 7-24 PeriodicInspections ........................................... 7-27 Record ...................................................... 7.3, 7.18 ScheduledMaintenance .................................... 6-87 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WhenTowingaTrailer ......................................... 4-44 Master Cylinder(See “Brakes”) 2-54 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Convexoutside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Electric Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56... Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ModelReference .................... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . 111 0 Odometer .......................... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Road Driving (See “Driving”) Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (Except Diesel) ............................................... Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PressureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WhatKindtoUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil(Diese1...................................................... Additives .................................................... Disposal of Used .............................................. ToCheck .................................................... What Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Parking OnHills ..................................................... Over Things That Burn ......................................... Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............................ Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Par~ngBrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.104,.60 Passing Other Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 6-17 6-23 6-28 2-80 6-18 6-19 6-18 6-28 6-24 6-28 6-28 6-25 6-26 6-28 6-28 7-22 4-43 2-32 2-29 2-32 2-28 7-24 Power 2-6 DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 6-43 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 PowerTake-Off(PT0) ........................................... 4-37 8-6 Product Service Publications ........................................ 642 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio (see “Audio Systems”) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 5-41 Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 1-15 Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84 Checking RestraintSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lapshoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 LargeChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 1-15 Properwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Questions and Answers ......................................... 1-14 Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Right Front Passenger Position ................................... 1-23 1-30 Small ChildrenandBabies ...................................... ......................................... 1-23 UseDuringPregnancy WhyThey Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 SafetyChains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 vi Safety Warningsand Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats 1-2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 1-9 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-3 PowerDriver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 8 Service Do-It-Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6,8-8 6-94 Replacement Parts and Filter Recornmendations ..................... Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74,6-65 Service Station Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-76 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 SpareTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Pickup Bed Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31.5-40 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Specificationcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Starting your Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Starting your Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Column Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59,2-61 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 2-58 GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Swing-Outwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Tiltwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25,5-32 Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Hub Caps/Wheel Nut Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Inspection/Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73,6-75 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Spare (See “Spare Tire”) Underbody Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 UniformTireQualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-31 Towing ATrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 6-67 FollowingDistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 4-44 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 9 TrailerBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83.6.63 TraileringPackage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35,6.37 Transmission Automatic ................................................... 2-21 ...................................... 2.22. 4,25 Five-SpeedManual Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36.0.33 Fluid. To Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33.6.34 Four-wheel (See “Four-wheel Drive”) Manual-ShiftSpeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 2-26 ShiftLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............................ 2-31 Tripodometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Turn Signalhlultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Turn SignaVLane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43. 2.86 Vehicle Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26.6-68 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . .6-52 . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vu, ~111,IX, x VentilationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 AirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Devices.Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance ................................. Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HubCapsandWheelNutCaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UsedReplacement ............................................ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SlidingRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WasherFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wipers,Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, BladeInserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bladechatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bladecleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 5-3 6-78 6-86 5-32 6-92 6-78 6-79 2-37 2-38 2-38 2-43 6-45 4-33 6-96 6-50 6-84 6-84 1 WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE